AV Receiver
Owner's Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
EN
CONTENTS
BEFORE USING THE UNIT 5
Accessories................................................................................................ 5
How to use this manual............................................................................ 5
Remote control.......................................................................................... 5
Insert the batteries................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Operating range of the remote control........................................................................................................................... 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit................................................................. 6
Part names and functions......................................................................... 9
Front panel................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Front display (indicators).................................................................................................................................................... 10
Rear panel................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Remote control....................................................................................................................................................................... 12
PREPARATIONS 13
1 Placing speakers............................................................................... 14
Typical speaker layouts....................................................................................................................................................... 15
Other speaker layouts.......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Setting the speaker impedance....................................................................................................................................... 17
2 Connecting speakers........................................................................ 18
Connecting speaker cables................................................................................................................................................ 19
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)................................................................................................. 19
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 19
Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 19
3 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................. 20
Input/output jacks and cables.......................................................................................................................................... 20
Connecting a TV..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players).............................................................................................. 22
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)......................................................................................................... 24
Connecting to the jack on the front panel................................................................................................................... 24
4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................... 25
FM/AM antennas (RX-V481)............................................................................................................................................... 25
DAB/FM antenna (RX-V481D)............................................................................................................................................ 25
5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................... 26
Connecting a network cable............................................................................................................................................. 26
Preparing a wireless antenna............................................................................................................................................ 26
6 Connecting the power cable............................................................ 27
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................... 28
8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................ 29
Error messages....................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Warning messages................................................................................................................................................................ 32
9 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................ 33
Selecting the connection method................................................................................................................................... 33
Connecting the unit to a wireless network.................................................................................................................. 34
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)...................................................................... 39
10 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................... 41
MusicCast CONTROLLER..................................................................................................................................................... 41
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network.................................................................................................................. 41
PLAYBACK 42
Basic playback procedure...................................................................... 42
Enjoying playback................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Switching information on the front display................................................................................................................. 43
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE).................................................................................................... 44
Selecting a registered scene.............................................................................................................................................. 44
Registering a scene............................................................................................................................................................... 44
En
2
Selecting the sound mode..................................................................... 45
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)............................................................................................ 46
Enjoying unprocessed playback...................................................................................................................................... 48
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)................................................................................................. 49
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)....................................................................................................................................... 49
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed
Music Enhancer)
..................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)
..................................................... 50
Setting the frequency steps............................................................................................................................................... 50
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 50
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)................................................................................................................ 51
Radio Data System tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 54
Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)....................................................... 55
Preparing the DAB tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 55
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................................. 56
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)...................................................................................................... 57
Displaying the DAB information...................................................................................................................................... 58
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label....................................................................................... 59
Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)......................................................... 60
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 60
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................................... 60
Radio Data System tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 63
Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device.............................. 64
Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit........................................................................................................... 64
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/headphones....................................................................................... 65
Playing back music with AirPlay............................................................ 66
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents...................................................................................................................... 66
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device............................ 68
Connecting a USB storage device................................................................................................................................... 68
Playback of USB storage device contents..................................................................................................................... 68
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)...................... 71
Media sharing setup............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Playback of PC music contents......................................................................................................................................... 72
Listening to Internet radio..................................................................... 74
Playback of Internet radio.................................................................................................................................................. 74
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)....................................................................................... 76
Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections
.................................................................................................................. 77
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 77
Playing back music in multiple rooms.................................................. 78
Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 78
Operating the Zone B........................................................................................................................................................... 79
Useful functions...................................................................................... 81
Registering favorite items (shortcut).............................................................................................................................. 81
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)......................................................................................... 83
Option menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 83
CONFIGURATIONS 87
Configuring various functions (Setup Menu)....................................... 87
Setup menu items................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Speaker...................................................................................................................................................................................... 90
HDMI........................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Sound......................................................................................................................................................................................... 95
ECO............................................................................................................................................................................................. 98
Function.................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Bluetooth............................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Language............................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 106
ADVANCED SETUP menu items..................................................................................................................................... 106
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.).............................................................................................. 106
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID).......................................................................................................... 107
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)............................................................................................ 107
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)......................................................................................................... 107
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE).................................................................................................... 107
Restoring the default settings (INIT)............................................................................................................................. 108
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)................................................................................................................................. 108
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)................................................................................................................. 108
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network................................... 109
En
3
APPENDIX 110
Frequently asked questions................................................................ 110
Troubleshooting................................................................................... 112
First, check the following:................................................................................................................................................ 112
Power, system and remote control............................................................................................................................... 112
Audio....................................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Video........................................................................................................................................................................................ 115
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-V481)........................................................................... 116
DAB radio (RX-V481D)....................................................................................................................................................... 116
USB and network................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Bluetooth®............................................................................................................................................................................. 118
Error indications on the front display................................................. 119
Glossary................................................................................................. 120
Audio information.............................................................................................................................................................. 120
HDMI and video information.......................................................................................................................................... 121
Network information......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Yamaha technologies........................................................................................................................................................ 121
Supported devices and file formats.................................................... 122
Supported devices.............................................................................................................................................................. 122
File formats............................................................................................................................................................................ 123
Video signal flow.................................................................................. 123
Information on HDMI........................................................................... 124
HDMI Control........................................................................................................................................................................ 124
Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................................................................................................................... 126
HDMI signal compatibility............................................................................................................................................... 126
Trademarks........................................................................................... 127
Specifications........................................................................................ 128
En
4
BEFORE USING THE UNIT
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
£ AM antenna (RX-V481) £ FM antenna (RX-V481)
* One of the above is supplied depending on
the region of purchase.
£ DAB/FM antenna (
RX-V481D) £
YPAO microphone
£ Remote control
£ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
£ CD-ROM (Owner's Manual)
£
Easy Setup Guide
£ Safety Brochure
£ MusicCast Setup Guide
How to use this manual
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-V481 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to
change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
Notice:
Indicates precautions for use to avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the unit.
Note:
Indicates instructions and supplementary explanations for optimum use.
Remote control
The supplied remote control is used as follows.
Insert the batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
Within 6 m (20 ft)
30° 30°
En
5
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with full of useful functions.
Supports 2- to 5.1-channel
speaker system
You can enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various
styles.
YPAO automatically optimizes the speaker
settings to suit your room.
• “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically
(YPAO)” (p.29)
CINEMA DSP allows you to create stereo or
multichannel sounds with the sound fields
like actual movie theaters and concert halls in
your own room.
•
“Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP
3D)” (p.46)
You can enjoy compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer).
• “Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as
MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)” (p.49)
The Zone A/B function allows you to playback
an input source in the room where the unit is
installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone
B).
• “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78)
Change the input source and
favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the input
source and settings registered to the corresponding
scene, such as sound program and Compressed
Music Enhancer on/off, with just one touch.
• “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)”
(p.
44)
4K Ultra HD signal and HDCP 2.2
supported
You can enjoy the high definition video quality of 4K
with HDCP 2.2 that complies with the latest copyright
protection.
• “Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K
MODE)” (p.107)
Wide variety of supported
content via network
When the unit is connected to a network by
establishing a wired or wireless connection, you can
enjoy various contents via network on the unit.
You can select a wired or wireless connection
to a network.
• “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.26)
• “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.33)
You can play back music files stored on your
PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/
NAS)” (p.
71
)
You can listen to Internet radio stations from
all over the world.
• “Listening to Internet radio” (p.74)
The AirPlay function allows you to play back
iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on
the unit via network.
• “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.66)
En
6
The ECO mode (power saving
function) allows you to create an
eco-friendly home theater system
When the ECO mode is enabled, you can reduce the
unit's power consumption.
• “ECO Mode” (p.98)
Sequential operation of a TV, AV
receiver, and BD/DVD player
(HDMI Control)
When the unit is connected to an HDMI Control-
compatible TV and BD/DVD player with each HDMI
cable, you can control the unit (such as power and
volume) and BD/DVD player with TV remote control
operations.
• “HDMI Control” (p.124)
Supports Bluetooth® devices
You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth device.
• “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth
®
device” (p.64)
Supports USB storage devices
You can play back music stored on a USB storage
device.
• “Playing back music stored on a USB storage
device” (p.
68)
Connecting various devices
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, portable audio player, and other
devices.
• “Connecting a TV/playback devices” (p.20)
Playing back TV audio in
surround sound with a single
HDMI cable connection (Audio
Return Channel: ARC)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
• “Connecting a TV” (p.21)
Creating 3-dimensional sound
fields
The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you
to create a 3-dimensional sound field that spreads up
and deep in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D).
• “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP
3D)” (p.46)
Surround playback with 5
speakers placed in front
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the
surround speakers are placed in front.
• “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.47)
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,
which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
• “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct
playback)” (p.49)
Enhanced bass reproduction
Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass
reproduction that does not depend on the speakers
used.
• “Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)” (p.49)
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-
V481)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
• “Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)” (p.50)
En
7
Listening to DAB/FM radio (RX-
V481D)
The unit is equipped with a built-in DAB/FM tuner. DAB
(Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for
clearer sound and more stable reception compared to
analog signals. You can register up to 40 favorite radio
stations as presets.
• “Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)” (p.55)
• “Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)” (p.60)
Easy operation with a TV screen
You can operate the USB storage device, view
information, or easily configure the settings using the
on-screen menu.
Auto Rename function
The unit automatically creates input source names
according to the HDMI-compatible devices connected,
and displays the respective input source names on the
front display.
• “Input Rename” (p.99)
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you
to link a MusicCast compatible device to another
device in a different room and play them back
simultaneously, or control all MusicCast compatible
devices with the dedicated application “MusicCast
CONTROLLER”.
• “Setting the MusicCast” (p.41)
Useful applications
The useful application for connections and operations
of the unit is as follows.
n
Application for tablets “AV SETUP
GUIDE”
AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists
you with cable connections between AV Receiver
and source devices as well as AV Receiver
setup.
This app guides you through the various settings
such as speaker connections, TV and source
device connections and assigning the power
amp.
Functions:
1) Connection support guide
– Speaker connection
– TV/source devices connection
2) Setup support guide
– Automatic network setup of HDMI, power amp
assign, etc.
– Various setup assistance with illustrations.
– YPAO setting guidance
3) View Owner's Manual
* This application is for tablets only.
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App
Store or Google Play™.
n
Application for smartphone /
tablets “AV CONTROLLER”
AV CONTROLLER is an application that assists
you with various operations of AV Receiver
without the remote control. This app allows you
not only to control the unit’s power and volume
but also to select the input source and start/stop
playback, as shown below.
Functions:
• Power on/off
•
Volume up/down
• Mute
• Music Play
• Input Selection
• DSP Mode Selection
• SCENE selection
• Blu-ray player fundamental control
• Seamless control between the Yamaha AV Receiver
and Blu-ray player
• Demo mode - Explains how to use this app
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App
Store or Google Play.
En
8
Part names and functions
The part names and functions of the unit and the supplied remote control are as follows.
Front panel
PROGRAM
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
AUX USB
AUDIO
5V 1A
SCENE
INPUT
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO MIC
MEMORY
INFO (WPS)
PRESET
FM AM TUNING
DIRECT
VOLUME
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
2
3 4 6 7 8
51 09
A
B C D E F H I JG
(RX-V481 U.S.A. model)
1
z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2
Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of
the following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.93)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.93)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.103)
3
YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.29).
4
Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5
INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.43).
Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (
p.35).
6
MEMORY
key
Registers radio stations as preset stations (p.51).
7
PRESET keys
Select a preset radio station (p.53).
8
FM and AM keys (RX-V481) or FM and DAB keys (RX-
V481D)
Switch between FM and AM (p.50) or FM and DAB
(p.55).
9
TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.50).
:
Front display
Displays information (p.10).
A
DIRECT key
Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.49).
B
PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
C
INPUT keys
Select an input source.
D
TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-
frequency range (Bass
) individually (p.84).
E
SCENE
keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby
mode (p.44).
F
PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.45).
G
STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.48).
Enters the MusicCast network addition and the wireless
LAN setup by holding down for 5 seconds (p.
41
).
H
AUX jack
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players
(p.24).
I
USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.68).
J
VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
En
9
Front display (indicators)
1 2
PARTY
VIRTUAL
2 3
CHARGE
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
A
ZONE
B
1
2
3
4
6 7 8
5
09 B 0
A
C D E
1
HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2
ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) is
working.
3
CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.46) or CINEMA DSP 3D
(p.46) is working.
4
STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio
signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
(RX-V481) or FM radio station (RX-V481D) signal.
5
Bluetooth indicator
Light up while the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device.
6
SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
7
MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
8
Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
9
ECO
Lights up when the eco mode (p.98) is enabled.
:
Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently
operational.
A
Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.
43
).
B
Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.33).
C
ZONE indicators
Indicate the zone to which the sound is output (p.80).
D
Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
E
ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.84) is working.
En
10
Rear panel
1
2
4 6
7 8
5
09
A
3
(RX-V481 U.S.A. model)
▪ The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white
on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
1
HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (
p.
20). When using ARC, TV audio
signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
2
HDMI 1–4 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.21).
3
ANTENNA
jacks
For connecting to the radio antennas (p.25).
4
NETWORK jack
For a wired connection to a network (p.26).
5
Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.26).
6
Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.27).
7
AV jacks
AUDIO jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (
p.22).
8
MONITOR OUT
jack
For connecting to a TV and outputting video signals
(p.20).
9
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
(p.18).
:
SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.18).
A
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Taiwan, Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.27).
En
11
Remote control
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROG RAM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS
INPUT
BD
DVD
TV
S C E NE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NE T
NET
BLUETOOTH
2
3
4
6
7
5
1
9
A
B
C
D
0
8
RX-V481( )
1
Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2
SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min,
90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to
the standby mode.
3
ZONE switch
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B
(p.79
).
4
SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.44).
5
Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.45).
6
Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
You can select directly each input source by pressing the
following keys.
FM/AM or
FM/DAB
FM/AM radio (RX-V481) or FM/DAB radio
(RX-V481D)
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
SERVER, NET RADIO, MusicCast Link,
AirPlay and network sources (press
repeatedly to select a desired source)
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth device
7
SETUP
key
Displays the setup menu (p.87).
8
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
89: External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET”
is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.
Note
▪ The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some
HDMI Control-compatible devices cannot be used.
▪ You can assign the unit's functions to the RED/GREEN/
YELLOW/BLUE keys (
p.
101).
:
Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected
as the input source (p.50).
MEMORY
Registers radio stations as presets.
PRESET
Select a preset station.
TUNING
Select the radio frequency.
A
z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
B
VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
C
MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
D
OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.83).
En
12
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers................................................................................................................................ (p.14)
2 Connecting speakers........................................................................................................................ (p.18)
3 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................................................................. (p.20)
4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................................................................... (p.25)
5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................................................................... (p.26)
6 Connecting the power cable............................................................................................................ (p.27)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................................................................... (p.28)
8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................................................................ (p.29)
9 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................................................................ (p.33)
10 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................................................................... (p.41)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En
13
1 Placing speakers
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker
layout examples.
Notice
▪ (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see
“Setting the speaker impedance” (p.17).
▪ (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 W.
▪ Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.
▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.
En
14
Typical speaker layouts
n
5.1-channel system
We recommend this speaker layout which can maximize the performance of the unit.
4 5
1 2
39
10° to 30° 10° to 30°
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Front (L/R)
1/2
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center
3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue
and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
4/5
Produce surround left/right channel sounds.
Subwoofer
9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.
Note
▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
▪ You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side.
n
5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
We recommend this speaker layout when the speakers can't be placed in back of the
room.
1 2
39
4 5
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Front (L/R)
1/2
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center
3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue
and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
4/5
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. By this
system, place the surround speakers in front.
Subwoofer
9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.
Note
▪ To utilize this configuration, set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
▪ You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side.
En
15
Other speaker layouts
The following speaker layouts are also available.
n
3.1-channel system
1 2
39
Note
In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to
play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see
“Playing back more high-quality sounds
with bi-amp connections” (p.77) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78).
n
2.1-channel system
1 2
9
Note
In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to
play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see
“Playing back more high-quality sounds
with bi-amp connections” (p.77) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78).
En
16
Setting the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
(power)
z
STRAIGHT
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
1 2
PARTY
VIRTUAL
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2 A
ZONE
3 B
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
En
17
2 Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for a 5.1-channel system as an example. For other systems, connect speakers
while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system.
Notice
▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
▪ The speaker has the polarity (+/-). Connect the speaker cable correctly between the positive (+) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and also between the negative (-) terminal of them.
Cables required for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
–
+
–
+
Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
9 3
5 4
2 1
The unit (rear)
Audio pin cable
Use a subwoofer with built-in
amplifier.
Subwoofer Surround (L)Surround (R)CenterFront (R) Front (L)
10 mm (3/8”)
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and
also damage the unit or the speakers.
▪ Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables
firmly together.
▪ Do not let the core wires of the speaker cable
touch one another.
▪ Do not let the core wires of the speaker cable
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts
(rear panel and screws).
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned
on, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker cables short circuit.
En
18
Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of
the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly
together.
2
Loosen the speaker terminal.
3
Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper
right or bottom left) of the terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models only)
1
Tighten the speaker terminal.
2
Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
AV 4
Audio pin cable
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B
terminals. For details, see “Playing
back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.77).
Note
Surround speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections.
Connecting Zone B speakers
The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the
unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B
speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.
78).
Note
Surround speakers or bi-amp speakers cannot be used during Zone B connections.
En
19
3 Connecting a TV/playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks
including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect
different types of playback devices. For information on
how to connect a Bluetooth device or a USB storage
device, see the following pages.
• Connecting a Bluetooth device (p.64)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.68)
Input/output jacks and cables
n
Video/audio jacks
HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a
single jack. Use an HDMI cable.
HDMI cable
Note
▪ Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We
recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to
prevent signal quality degradation.
▪ The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio
Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video
transmission (through output) features.
▪ Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD
videos.
n
Video jacks
VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin
cable.
Video pin cable
n
Audio jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
Digital coaxial cable
AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
pin cable (RCA cable).
Stereo pin cable
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a
stereo mini-plug cable.
Stereo mini-plug cable
En
20
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You
can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an
HDMI cable.
n
HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O O
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O O
The unit (rear)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack
HDMI OUT jack HDMI input
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
Note
▪ You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
▪ If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit.
For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.
124).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
▪ ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
n
Composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
Note
▪
If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
▪ If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
VIDEO (composite video) connection
Connect the TV to the unit with a video pin cable and a digital optical cable.
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O O
MONITOR
OUT
V
V
The unit (rear)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
En
21
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your
video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an
HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
Note
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.23).
n
HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI 1–4 jacks
Video device
Note
To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit
(p.21).
n
Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 2–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
Digital optical
You need to change the combination
of video/audio input jacks (p.23).
R
L
COAXIAL
R
L
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
C C
L
R
L
R
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 1 (COAXIAL) jack or AV 2–4
(AUDIO) jacks
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog
stereo)
Video device
Note
If you connect a video device to the unit via composite video connection, you need to connect your TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.21).
En
22
n
Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device.
You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
AV 1 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–4 AV 2–4 (AUDIO)
Composite video Digital optical AV 1–4 (VIDEO) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (VIDEO) and AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL) jack of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O O
V
V
The unit (rear)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack
AV 2 (VIDEO) jack
Video output
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital optical)
Video device
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press INPUT to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as
the input source.
3
Press OPTION.
MUTE
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
ENTER
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
MUTE
TO
P MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLA
Y
DISPLADISPLA
RETURN
SETU
P
P
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press
ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio In
VOL.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO 1” (audio input
jack to be used).
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio••AUDIO 1
VOL.
6
Press OPTION.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
En
23
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital optical AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
AV 1 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 2–4 (AUDIO)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
C C
L
R
L
R
O O
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
Audio output
(either digital optical, digital coaxial,
or analog stereo)
Audio device
Connecting to the jack on the front panel
Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable
audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume
on the unit.
PROGRAM
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
AUX USB
AUDIO
5V 1A
INPUT
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
The unit (front)
Portable audio player
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on
the device will be output from the unit.
Note
▪ You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
▪ For details on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.68).
En
24
4 Connecting the radio antennas
FM/AM antennas (RX-V481)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
The unit (rear)
FM antenna
AM antenna
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
ReleaseHold down Insert
Note
▪ Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
▪ The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
DAB/FM antenna (RX-V481D)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
The unit (rear)
DAB/FM antenna
Note
▪ The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
En
25
5 Preparing for connecting to a network
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the
wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting a network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable
(CAT-5 or higher straight cable).
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Wireless
router
PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)
Note
▪ If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the
unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only
need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the
network parameters manually (p.
102).
▪ You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu.
▪ Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
▪ Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
▪ To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing a wireless antenna
If you connect the unit wirelessly, erect the wireless antenna.
For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see “Connecting to a
network wirelessly”
(p.33).
Erect the wireless antenna.
WIRELESS
Note
Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna.
En
26
6 Connecting the power cable
Warning
(Taiwan, Brazil and General models only)
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall
outlet. Improper setting of
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
may cause damage to the unit and create a potential
fire hazard.
Before connecting the power cable
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR
according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–
120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
The unit (rear)
To an AC wall outlet
En
27
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Note
▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If
not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
▪ If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. To
continue the language setup, press
RETURN.
3
Press
SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
Back
RETURN
5
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Note
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
28
8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker
connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then
automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
Note
▪ When you use the front 5.1-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration (p.15), set “Virtual
CINEMA FRONT” (p.91) in the “
Setup” menu to “
On” beforehand.
▪ Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not
frighten small children.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
– Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about
3 minutes).
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Note
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If
not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover
frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CRO
SSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN
MAX
9
Note
If you are using bi-amp connections or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.90) in the
“Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
Note
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend
the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the
microphone.
1 2
3
9
4 5
The unit (front)
Ear height
The following screen appears on the TV.
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Power Amp Assign
Zone B
1
1
“Power Amp Assign” setting (p.90)
En
29
5
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start”
and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the
measurement immediately.
Note
To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error
messages”
(p.31).
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes.
Auto Setup
Measurement Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
OK : ENTER
1
2
3
4
1
The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer)
2
Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3
Adjustment range of speaker output level
4
Warning message (if available)
Note
▪ If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error
messages”
(p.31) or
“Warning messages” (p.32).
▪ A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display.
▪ If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w)
to check the other warning messages.
6
Confirm the results displayed on the screen and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Auto Setup
Start
Exit < SAVE >
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
Note
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
8
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Notice
▪ The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be
exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment).
En
30
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and
perform YPAO again.
Auto Setup
ERROR
E-9 : User Cancel
< RETRY >
2 %
Error message
TV screen
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
E-5:NOISY
VOL.
Front display
n
Procedure to handle errors
1
Check the content of error message and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
1
Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
3
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning:
1
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.
To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9
only):
1
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not
detected.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then
check the speaker connections.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
One of the surround
speakers cannot be
detected.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If
you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the
measurement again and ignores any
noise detected.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the
YPAO MIC
jack firmly and retry YPAO.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone
cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the
YPAO MIC
jack firmly and retry YPAO. If
this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has been
canceled.
Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.
E-10:Internal Err.
(
E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has
occurred.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If
this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
Note
Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
En
31
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the
measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the
optimal speaker settings.
Auto Setup
Measurement Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
OK : ENTER
W-1 : Out of Phase
Warning message
TV screen
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
W-1:PHASE
VOL.
Problem speaker (blinks)
Front display
n
Procedure to handle warnings
1
Check the content of warning message and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
1
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To discard the measurement result:
1
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
A speaker cable may be
connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the
problem speaker.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker
cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or
room environment, this message may
appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you
can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
A speaker is placed more
than 24 m (80 ft) from the
listening position.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the
problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the
listening position.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are significant volume
differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable
connections (+/-) of each speaker, and
the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit,
and then reconnect speaker cable or
correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or
speakers with specifications that are as
similar as possible.
Note
Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
En
32
9 Connecting to a network wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing
a wireless connection.
Note
When you connect the unit to a router with a network cable, you need not do this procedure.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
n
Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.8) to
control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on
the unit.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
Wireless router
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.34).
Note
▪ You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.26) or
Wireless Direct (
p.39).
▪
If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
n
Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.8) to
control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on
the unit.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.39).
Note
▪
You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.26) or the wireless LAN
connection (p.
34
).
▪ When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any
kind of Internet service such as Internet radio.
▪ Also the mobile device cannot connect to the Internet, so we recommend you disconnect the mobile
device from the unit.
En
33
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
• The connection setting to MusicCast network.
– “Setting the MusicCast” (p.41)
• The connection settings on iOS devices
– “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.34)
• The WPS button configuration method
– “Using the WPS button configuration” (p.35)
• Other connection methods
– “Using other connection methods” (p.36)
n
Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS
devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router.
Note
The sharing process will restore the default settings for the following.
▪ Network settings
▪ NET presets
▪ Bluetooth settings
▪ Music streaming service accounts
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Note
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press
ENTER.
Network Connection
Connection <Wireless(Wi-Fi)>
Connect to router
over wired connection.
Back
RETURN
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “WAC(iOS)” and press
ENTER.
Wireless(Wi-Fi)
Select a setup method.
WPS Button
WAC(iOS)
Access Point Scan
Manual Setting
PIN Code
Perform wireless setup
by sharing iOS device's
network settings
with this device.
Back
RETURN
8
Read the on-screen description and press ENTER.
Note
When you use wired network connection, a warning message is displayed on the screen.
Disconnect the network cable from the unit, and then press
ENTER.
9
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-
Fi screen.
iOS 9 (example of English version)
The name of the unit
En
34
10
Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the
settings with the unit.
The network currently selected
Tap here to start setup
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point) and “Completed” appears on the
front display.
If “Not shared” or “Not connected” appears, press ENTER to repeat from
step 5 or try another connection method.
11
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
n
Using the WPS button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front
display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection
method.
Note
▪ Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not connect to it. In this case,
try connection with “
Access Point Scan
” or “Manual Setting” (p.36).
▪ You can use “WPS Button” (p.36) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button.
About WPS
▪ WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
En
35
n
Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button configuration
method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Note
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press
ENTER.
Network Connection
Connection <Wireless(Wi-Fi)>
Connect to router
over wired connection.
Back
RETURN
Note
The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has connected previously. In this
case, the message indicating the successful connection will appear. You can ignore this message
and proceed to the next step.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired connection
method and press ENTER.
Wireless(Wi-Fi)
Select a setup method.
WPS Button
WAC(iOS)
Access Point Scan
Manual Setting
PIN Code
Perform wireless setup
by sharing iOS device's
network settings
with this device.
Back
RETURN
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while
viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV
screen.
WAC(iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.34).
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access
point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access
point” (p.37).
Manual Setting
You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required
information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see
“Setting up the wireless connection manually”
(p.38
).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN
code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available
if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code
method. For details on settings, see “Using the WPS PIN
code” (p.39).
En
36
Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts
searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points
appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point
and press ENTER.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
Access Point Scan
SSID : Access Point X
Security : WPA2-PSK (AES)
Security Key :
Connect
Edit : ENTER
Back
RETURN
2
Press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.
_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @ + - =
>
←
Aa BKSP Space DEL
→
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
Button functions
[¬]/[→]:
Moves the cursor left and right.
[Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower).
[BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one.
[Space]: Enters a space.
[DEL]: Deletes the selected character.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous
screen.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the
TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another
connection method.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
37
Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection
setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key
for your network.
Manual Setting
SSID :
Security : None
Security Key :
Connect
Edit : ENTER
Back
RETURN
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point.
_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @ + - =
>
←
Aa BKSP Space DEL
→
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous
screen.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor
keys (e/r) to select the encryption method.
Choices
None, WEP, WPA-PSK(AES), Mixed Mode
Note
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not
encrypted.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press
ENTER.
Note
If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.
If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter either 8 to
63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @ + - =
>
←
Aa BKSP Space DEL
→
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous
screen.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the
TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered
correctly, and repeat from step 1.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
38
Using the WPS PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access
points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point
and press ENTER.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
PIN Code
PIN Code : 00000000
Enter the PIN code
into the access point.
Press ENTER to start
the connection process.
Back
RETURN
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless
router (access point).
3
Press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the
TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another
connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
Note
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may
operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Note
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless Direct” and press
ENTER.
Connection <Wireless Direct>
Establish wireless
peer-to-peer connection
directly with device,
without going through
home network.
Cannot connect to internet.
Network Connection
Back
RETURN
En
39
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor
keys (e/r) to select the encryption method.
Choices
None, WPA2-PSK(AES)
Note
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press
ENTER.
Note
If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available.
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.
Enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @ + - =
>
←
Aa BKSP Space DEL
→
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous
screen.
Note
Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These information will be
needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device.
▪ SSID displayed on the TV screen
▪ Security key you have just entered
10
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and press ENTER to
save the setting.
This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on the TV screen.
Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction
manual of the mobile device.
1
Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
2
Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available access
points.
3
When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in step 9.
12
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
40
10 Setting the MusicCast
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha, allowing you to
share music among all of your rooms with a variety of devices. You can enjoy music
from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and music streaming service anywhere in your
house with one easy-to-use application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast
compatible products, visit the Yamaha website.
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play
them back simultaneously.
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music streaming
services may differ depending on your region and product).
MusicCast CONTROLLER
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you need the
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the operation. Search for the
free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play and
install it to your device.
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network. You can also
configure the unit’s wireless network settings at once.
Note
The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on your
mobile device and tap “Setup”.
Note
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the network, tap “Settings”
and then “Add New Device”.
3
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the
on screen instructions, then hold down CONNECT on the front
panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
CONNECT
4
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the
onscreen instructions to set up the network.
5
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to playback.
Note
▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
▪ When the direct playback mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and
USB cannot be delivered.
En
41
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
Enjoying playback
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player)
connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
MUTE
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROG RAM
USB
INPUT
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
PR
OG R
AM
VOLUME
MU
TE
Input selection keys
3
Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages.
▪ “Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)” (p.50)
▪ “Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)” (p.55)
▪ “Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)” (p.60)
▪ “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth
®
device” (p.64)
▪
“Playing back music stored on a USB storage device” (p.68)
▪ “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.71)
▪ “Listening to Internet radio” (p.74)
▪ “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.66)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
Note
▪ To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
▪ To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel
(p.84).
En
42
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display
items.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio Decoder
VOL.
Item name
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
information appears.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
†‡Pro Logic
VOL.
Information
Note
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be
applied separately to each input group which is shown in the table below and divided by ruled lines.
Currently input source Item
HDMI
AV
AUX
AUDIO
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP
Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP
Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER (FM/AM)
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a
Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.54).
TUNER (DAB)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.58) for details.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder
is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En
43
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program,
Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target zones with just one touch.
Selecting a registered scene
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are
selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
PROG RAM
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS
BD
DVD
TV
S C E NE
RADIO
SLEEP
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NE T
PR
OG R
AM
ST
RA
IGHT
ENHANCER
BA
SS
SLEEP
DIRECT
ZONE
A Z
O
NE
B
SCENE
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
SCENE
Input
HDMI1 AUDIO1 NET RADIO TUNER
Sound program
Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 5ch Stereo 5ch Stereo
Compressed Music
Enhancer
Off On On On
SCENE link playback
On On Off Off
Target zone
Zone A Zone A Zone A Zone A
Note
The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable
SCENE link
playback, set “
SCENE” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
Registering a scene
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want
to assign to a scene.
▪ Select an input source (p.42)
▪ Select a sound program (p.45) or straight decode (p.48)
▪ Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49)
▪ Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.79)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears
on the front display.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
SET Complete
VOL.
En
44
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that
allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound
field effect or stereo playback).
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
PROG RAM
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS
BD
DVD
TV
S C E NE
RADIO
SLEEP
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NE T
BD
DV
D
TV
S C E N
E
R
ADIO
SLEEP
ZONE
A Z
O
NE
B
NE T
STRAIGHT
D
IRECT
ENHANCER
BASS
PROGRAM
I want to enjoy viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, or
games.
• Select a sound program suitable for each video source by pressing PROGRAM
repeatedly (p.
46).
I want to enjoy listening to music sources or stereo playback.
• Select a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback by pressing
PROGRAM
repeatedly (p.47).
I want to enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel sources.
•
Select a surround decoder in the “Option” menu (p.83).
I want to enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels.
• Switch to the straight decode mode by pressing STRAIGHT (p.48).
I want to enjoy pure high fidelity sounds.
• Enable the direct playback mode by pressing DIRECT (p.49).
This mode reduces the electrical noise from other circuitry to allow you to enjoy Hi-Fi
sound quality.
I want to enjoy enhanced bass sounds.
• Enable Extra Bass by pressing BASS (p.49).
I want to enjoy listening to compressed music.
• Enable Compressed Music Enhancer by pressing ENHANCER (p.49).
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music stored on a Bluetooth device or USB
storage device with additional depth and breadth (p.49).
Note
▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
▪ When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode
(p.48) is automatically selected.
▪ You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the
unit’s front panel (p.10).
En
45
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original
DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like
actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic
sound fields.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Sound program category
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Sound program
Note
▪ You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level (DSP Level)” (p.84) in the “Option” menu.
▪ To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
n
Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range,
providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of
the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both
sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The
restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also
maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the
channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening
for long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic
movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program
creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the
appropriate reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport
broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the
commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the
atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral
delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and
fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes
the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for
greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed
Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic
reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a
wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with
Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
En
46
n
Sound programs suitable for music (MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the
left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts,
as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert
atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a
presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments,
and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
n
Sound programs suitable for stereo playback (STEREO)
You can select stereo playback.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA
DSP).
5ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
Note
CINEMA DSP 3D (p.46) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.47) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “5ch Stereo” is
selected.
n
Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound
field using the front-side speakers.
n
Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in
front.
n
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT
CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
En
47
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing.
n
Playing back in original channels (straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the
front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed
multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or
disabled.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STRAIGHT
VOL.
n
Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel
sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight
decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.120).
1
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select a surround decoder.
The previously selected surround decoder is selected. You can change
the surround decoder in “Sur.Decode” (p.83) in the “Option” menu.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
PROG RAM
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS
BD
DVD
TV
S C E NE
RADIO
SLEEP
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NE T
ST
RA
IGHT
ENHANCER
BA
SS
BD
DV
D
TV
S C E N
E
R
ADIO
SLEEP
DIREC
T
ZONE
A Z
O
NE
B
NE T
PROGRAM
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
†‡Pro Logic
VOL.
“SUR. DECODE” appears
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources.
bPLII Movie
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for movies.
bPLII Music
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for music.
bPLII Game
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for games.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
Note
You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
En
48
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source
with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such
as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or
disabled.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
DIRECT
VOL.
Note
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
▪ Selecting sound programs
▪ Adjusting the tone control
▪ Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
▪ Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)
Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the
front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer.
1
Press BASS.
Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled.
Note
You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass.
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as
MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to
enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This
function can be used along with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or
disabled.
MUTE
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Enhancer On
VOL.
ENHANCER
“ENHANCER” lights up
Note
▪ Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio
▪ You can also use “Enhancer (Enhancer)” (p.85) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
En
49
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from
registered radio stations.
Note
▪ The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The
explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.
▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM.
Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and
10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z
(power).
(power)
z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TU••••FM50/AM9
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM/AM to select a band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently
selected is displayed.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
En
50
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
PRESET
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
TUNING
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Note
▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by
selecting “
FM Mode” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
▪
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video
input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)”
(p.86) in the “Option” menu.
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations,
you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers.
n
Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Note
▪ To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually” (p.52).
▪ (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM/AM to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Preset
VOL.
En
51
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
Note
▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or
PRESET to select a preset number.
▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu
closes automatically.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
n
Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.50) to tune into
the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will
be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station
you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number
after the most recently registered number.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELLYELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
MEMORY
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset number
Note
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio
station, press PRESET
to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
En
52
n
Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM/AM to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
TUNING
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELLYELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
PRESET
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Note
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
n
Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM/AM to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Preset
VOL.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STEREO
TUNED
01:Cleared
VOL.
6
Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
7
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
53
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many
countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text
” and “Clock Time
”, when it is tuned
into a Radio Data System broadcasting station.
n
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
Note
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations
(p.51).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed
item appears.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Information
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
Frequency
Frequency
Note
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio
station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
n
Receiving traffic information automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic
information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic
information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram)
and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the search immediately.
Note
▪ To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while
“READY” is displayed.
▪ To cancel the search, press RETURN.
▪ Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search
finishes.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TP FM101.30MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
Traffic information station (frequency)
Note
“TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found.
En
54
Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more
stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an
upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec
(AAC+), which has a more efficient transmission method.
Note
▪ The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
▪ Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list
of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at
http://www.worlddab.org/
.
▪
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.25).
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial
scan.
1
Press FM/DAB to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
performed an initial scan yet.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Press [ENTER]
VOL.
2
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
>>>------- 30%
VOL.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first
DAB radio station as stored in station order.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
Note
▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again.
Press
ENTER to start an initial scan again.
▪
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.59).
▪ To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan”
(p.83) in the “Option
” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations
currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared.
En
55
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan.
1
Press FM/DAB to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station
currently selected is displayed.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/DAB
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
PRESET
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLU
E
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
TUNING
(RX-V481D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Daily Service
VOL.
Note
▪ “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available.
▪ When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
BBC National
VOL.
Secondary station
▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video
input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)”
(p.86) in the “Option” menu.
En
56
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered
stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers.
Note
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
n
Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.56) to tune
into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will
be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station
you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number
after the most recently registered number.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/DAB
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLU
E
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
MEMORY
(RX-V481D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:BBC Radio 4
VOL.
Preset number
Note
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio
station, press PRESET
to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
n
Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/DAB
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
TUNING
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLU
E
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
PRESET
(RX-V481D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
PRESET:01
VOL.
Note
“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
En
57
n
Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Preset
VOL.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STEREO
TUNED
01:
Clear?
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STEREO
TUNED
01:Cleared
VOL.
6
Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
7
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB
radio station.
1
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display
items.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
VOL.
Item name
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
information appears.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Classic Music
VOL.
Information
Service Label
Station name
DLS (Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label
Ensemble name
Program Type
Station genre
Date And Time
Current date and time
Audio Mode
Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq.
Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality
Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
Note
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station.
En
58
Checking reception strength of
each DAB channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel
label (0 [none] to 100 [best]).
1
Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune
Aid” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired DAB channel label.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
5A Level: 80
VOL.
DAB channel label Reception strength
5
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
n
DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency Channel label
174.928 MHz 5A
176.640 MHz 5B
178.352 MHz 5C
180.064 MHz 5D
181.936 MHz 6A
183.648 MHz 6B
185.360 MHz 6C
187.072 MHz 6D
188.928 MHz 7A
190.640 MHz 7B
192.352 MHz 7C
194.064 MHz 7D
195.936 MHz 8A
197.648 MHz 8B
199.360 MHz 8C
201.072 MHz 8D
202.928 MHz 9A
204.640 MHz 9B
206.352 MHz 9C
208.064 MHz 9D
209.936 MHz 10A
211.648 MHz 10B
213.360 MHz 10C
215.072 MHz 10D
216.928 MHz 11A
218.640 MHz 11B
220.352 MHz 11C
222.064 MHz 11D
223.936 MHz 12A
225.648 MHz 12B
227.360 MHz 12C
229.072 MHz 12D
230.784 MHz 13A
Frequency Channel label
232.496 MHz 13B
234.208 MHz 13C
235.776 MHz 13D
237.488 MHz 13E
239.200 MHz 13F
En
59
Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)
You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from
registered radio stations.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM/DAB to select the FM band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently
selected is displayed.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/DAB
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
PRESET
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLU
E
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
TUNING
(RX-V481D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from an FM radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Note
▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception from
“FM Mode” (
p.
83) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is
unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video
input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)”
(p.86) in the “Option” menu.
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered
stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers.
Note
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
n
Registering FM radio stations automatically (Auto
Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Note
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Preset
VOL.
En
60
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
Note
▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or
PRESET to select a preset number.
▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu
closes automatically.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
n
Registering an FM radio station manually
Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.50) to tune into
the desired FM radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio
station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset
number after the most recently registered number.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/DAB
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLU
E
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
MEMORY
(RX-V481D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset number
Note
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio
station, press PRESET
to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
En
61
n
Selecting a preset FM radio station
Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM radio station.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/DAB
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
TUNING
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLU
E
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
PRESET
(RX-V481D)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Note
“No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered.
n
Clearing preset FM radio stations
Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Preset
VOL.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STEREO
TUNED
01:Cleared
VOL.
6
Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
7
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
62
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many
countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text
” and “Clock Time
”, when it is tuned
into a Radio Data System broadcasting station.
n
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
Note
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations
(p.51).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed
item appears.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Information
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
Frequency
Frequency
Note
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio
station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
En
63
Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on
the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/
headphones.
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
The unit
Bluetooth speakers/headphones
The unit
Note
▪ To use the BLUETOOTH function, set “Bluetooth” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
▪ You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and Bluetooth
speakers/headphones at the same time.
▪ For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122).
Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth
device on the unit.
Note
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source.
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit)
from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
displayed on the TV.
Note
▪ If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to
the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the
current Bluetooth connection.
▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu.
▪ You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control
to control playback.
En
64
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/
headphones
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth
speakers/headphones and the unit.
1
Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an
input source.
Select an input source other than Bluetooth.
2
Press SETUP.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Bluetooth” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to set “Bluetooth” to “On”, and then set
“Transmitter” to “On” in the same way.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Device Search” to search the
Bluetooth devices.
The list of available Bluetooth devices is displayed.
6
Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with
the unit and press ENTER.
When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the unit will
be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Note
▪ If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing
mode and then select “
Device Search”.
▪
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth
speakers/headphones.
En
65
Playing back music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music
on the unit via network.
PC
iTunes
(Wired network or wireless network)
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
The unit
Router
Note
▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.26). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu.
▪ If the iPod does not recognize the unit, check your network environment (p.26).
▪ This section describes “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod touch”,
“iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
▪ For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the
playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
iTunes (example) iOS 9 (example)
Note
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router
properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts
playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
En
66
Note
▪ The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
▪ You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network
Standby” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
▪ You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network
Name” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu.
▪ You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)” (p.86) in the “Option” menu to “Off”.
Notice
▪ When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
n
Playback screen
AirPlay
Song
2 : 30
Album
Artist
2
1
1
Playback indicator
2
Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
External device operation
keys
External device
operation keys
Function
a
Resumes playback from pause.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
En
67
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
Note
For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
AUX USB
AUDIO
5V 1A
RADIO
The unit (front)
USB storage device
Note
▪ If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case, “Loading…”
appears in the front display.
▪ Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
▪ Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start
playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Note
▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen (p.69) is displayed on the TV.
Note
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.69) is
displayed.
Note
▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
En
68
n
Browse screen
USB - Top
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
1/9999
1
4
2
5
3
1
List name
2
Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3
Item number/total
4
Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.70) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
5
Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
Note
A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display.
n
Playback screen
USB
Song
2 : 30
Album
Artist
2
1
1
Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.70) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
2
Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
External device operation
keys
External device
operation keys
Function
a
Resumes playback from pause.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Note
A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch the displayed item, press
INFO
(p.43).
En
69
n
Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device
contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle”
(Shuffle) and press ENTER.
Note
▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
▪ Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c”
appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album (folder)
in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
70
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
Note
▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.26). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu.
▪ The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
▪ For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
n
For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s
model name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and
click “Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
Note
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
n
For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
En
71
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Note
▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source.
The browse screen (p.72) is displayed on the TV.
Note
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is
displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.73) is
displayed.
Note
▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
n
Browse screen
SERVER - Top
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
1/9999
1
4
2
5
3
1
List name
2
Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to confirm the selection.
3
Item number/total
4
Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.73) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
5
Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
En
72
n
Playback screen
SERVER
Song
2 : 30
Album
Artist
2
1
1
Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.73) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
2
Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELL
YELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
External device operation
keys
External device
operation keys
Function
a
Resumes playback from pause.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Note
You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see
“DMC Control” (p.103).
n
Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle”
(Shuffle) and press ENTER.
Note
▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c”
appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album (folder)
in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
73
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
Note
▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.26). You can check whether the network
parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information”
(p.102
) in the
“Setup” menu.
▪ You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
▪ The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
▪ This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and start playback.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source.
The browse screen (p.74) is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen (p.75) is displayed.
Note
▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.
n
Browse screen
NET RADIO - Top
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
1/7
1
4
2
5
3
1
List name
2
Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3
Item number/total
4
Playback indicator
5
Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press
ENTER to confirm the selection.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
En
74
n
Playback screen
NET RADIO
Song
2 : 30
Album
Station
2
1
1
Playback indicator
2
Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Note
▪ Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.
▪ Some information may not be available depending on the station.
En
75
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder.
n
Registering the station with the Option menu
Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the “Bookmarks” folder.
1
While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER.
Note
▪ On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. On the browse screen, the
station selected in the list is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
▪ To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then
“Bookmark Off”.
n
Registering the station on the vTuner website
You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations on the vTuner website.
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the
web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
You can switch the language.
Note
To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-
mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (¤+) next to the station name.
Note
To remove the station from the “My__Favorites” folder, select “My__Favorites” in the Home screen,
and then click the “Remove” icon (¤–) next to the station name.
En
76
Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections
Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers allows you to have more high-
quality sounds.
For example, you can use 2-way bi-amplified speakers with a woofer and tweeter for
front speakers. It produces expansive sound in bi-amp system featuring a woofer and
tweeter. By directly driving each speaker individually, it produces powerful sound
while maintaining the feeling of high S/N ratio.
Note
When using the four internal amplifiers in bi-amp system, the unit supports only 2.1 or 3.1-channel speaker
system.
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B
terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu
to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
1 2
3
9
The unit (rear)
Note
▪ Surround speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections.
▪ The FRONT terminals and SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals output the same signals.
Notice
▪ Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
En
77
Playing back music in multiple rooms
The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the
unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B).
For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room,
and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can
turn on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms
simultaneously.
Living room (Zone A)
Study room (Zone B)
Note
▪ When connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack, you cannot use Zone B speakers.
▪ Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the Zone B.
▪ The same input source is applied to both Zone A and Zone B.
▪ By default, the volume for Zone B changes in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. If there is volume
difference between Zone A/B, you can correct it in “ZoneB Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.80). Also, you
can adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.80).
▪
You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection
(p.44)
Connecting Zone B speakers
Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit.
Notice
▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers.
▪ Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires
” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables.
To utilize the SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals for Zone B speakers, set “Power
Amp Assign” (p.
90
) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone B” after connecting the power
cable to an AC wall outlet.
1 2
1 2
39
The unit (rear)
Zone A
Zone B
Note
Surround speakers or bi-amp speakers cannot be used during Zone B connections.
En
78
Operating the Zone B
n
Basic playback procedure
1
Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
PROG RAM
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS
BD
DVD
TV
S C E NE
RADIO
SLEEP
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NE T
PR
OG R
AM
ST
RA
IGHT
ENHANCER
BA
SS
BD
DV
D
TV
S C E N
E
R
ADIO
SLEEP
DIRECT
NE T
ZONE A
Z
ONE B
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, the ZONE B audio output is on or off.
1 2
PARTY
VIRTUAL
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
2 3
ZONE
A
ZONE
B
VOL.
HDMI1
“ZONE B” lights up
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
MUTE
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROG RAM
USB
INPUT
NET
BLUETOOTH
MUTE
V
OLUME
PR
OG R
AM
Input selection keys
Input selection keys
4
Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.
5
Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” and then press VOLUME to
adjust the volume.
Note
To adjust the volume for Zone B separately, see “Adjusting the volume for Zone B
separately”
(p.80).
En
79
n
Correcting volume difference between Zone A and
Zone B
If you are bothered by volume difference between Zone A/B, follow the procedure
below to adjust the volume for Zone B.
1
Press OPTION.
Note
Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” in menu operations.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim” (Volume Trim) and
press ENTER.
Note
▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim” (ZB.Trim) and
the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the setting.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Note
This setting is not effective when “ZoneB Volume” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”.
n
Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately
You can separately adjust the volume for Zone B using the remote control when
“ZoneB Volume”
(p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”.
1
Slide the Zone switch to “
ZONE B”.
2
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume for Zone B.
Note
▪ To mute the audio output to Zone B, press MUTE.
▪ The volume of the Zone B is not displayed on the front display.
En
80
Useful functions
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access
them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.
Note
▪ You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.76).
▪ Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be
registered.
n
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Hold down MEMORY for 3 seconds.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELLYELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
MEMORY
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:Empty
VOL.
Shortcut number (flashes)
Note
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the
shortcut number after step 2.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En
81
n
Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
MUTE
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROG RAM
USB
INPUT
NET
BLUETOOTH
MUTE
FM/AM
V
OLUME
PR
OG R
AM
IN
PU
T
USB
N
ET
BLUETOOTH
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item.
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP UP/MENU
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
TUNING
TUNING
MEMO
RY
TO
P
MENU
HOME
POP
UP/MENU
BLUE
YELL
OW
YELLYELL
G
REE
N
RE
D
PRESET
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:USB
VOL.
Note
▪ “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
▪ The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit.
– A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
▪ When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the
relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or
from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items
again.
En
82
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
VOL.
Input Select
Front display
Option
Input Select
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info.
Audio In
Back
RETURN
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Note
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
Note
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
▪ Default settings are underlined.
▪ Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.
For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
Item Function Page
Input Select (Input Select)
Switches the input source. p.84
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-
frequency range individually.
p.
84
DSP/Surround
(DSP/
Surround)
Program (PRG)
Select the sound programs and stereo playback. p.46
Sur.Decode
(SrDec)
Select which surround decoder is used when
Sur.Decode
is selected as the program.
p.
48
DSP Level
(DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level. p.84
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
p.84
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. p.85
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. p.85
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. p.85
ZoneB Trim
(ZB.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. p.80
Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”
menu.
p.85
Signal Info.
(Signal Info.)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
p.85
Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source
with an audio jack of others.
p.86
Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. p.86
FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception.
p.50,
p.60
En
83
Item Function Page
Preset (Preset)
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
p.
51,
p.
60
Clear Preset
Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers.
p.
53,
p.58
,
p.62
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
p.54
Repeat (Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage
device (
p.
70) or media server (p.73).
—
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage
device (p.70) or media server (p.73).
—
Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod
via AirPlay.
p.86
Bookmark On (Bookmark On)
Bookmark Off (Bookmark Off)
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the
“Bookmarks” folder, or removes it from the
“Bookmarks” folder.
p.76
Init Scan (Init Scan)
(RX-V481D only)
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
p.55
Tune Aid (Tune Aid)
(RX-V481D only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel.
p.59
n
Input Select (Input Select)
Switches the input source. Press ENTER to switch to the selected input source.
Choices
HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, MusicCast Link,
AirPlay, (network sources), Bluetooth
,
AUX
n
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
individually.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to
0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Note
▪ When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
▪ You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or
“Bass”, then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
▪ If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
n
DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)
Configures the sound field program and surround settings.
DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
On
(On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
En
84
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49).
Note
▪ This setting is applied separately to each input source.
▪ You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.49).
Settings
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Default
TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay (network sources), Bluetooth: On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
n
Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Note
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to
0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
n
Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu.
Note
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
n
Signal Info. (Signal Info.)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
Choices
Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal
Channel (CHANNEL)
The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and
LFE.
Sampling (SAMPLING) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate (BITRATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Video In (VIDEO IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal
Video Out
(VIDEO OUT
)
Type and resolution of the output digital signal
Note
To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
En
85
n
Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For
example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI
audio output
Input sources
HDMI 1-4, AV 1-4
Setup procedure
See “Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks” (p.23).
n
Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can
watch the video while listening to the radio.
Input sources
AUDIO, TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, Bluetooth, AUX
Settings
Off (Off) Does not output video.
HDMI 1-4, AV 1-4 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
n
Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Settings
Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (Ltd)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full (Full)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
En
86
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup Menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
Note
▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
▪ If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Bluetooth
Language
Back
RETURN
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Speaker
Configuration
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Note
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
87
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Configuration
Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system. p.90
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. p.90
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers. p.90
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. p.90
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. p.91
Crossover
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. p.91
Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. p.91
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass. p.91
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. p.91
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. p.91
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker. p.92
Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. p.92
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. p.92
HDMI
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control. p.93
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio. p.93
Standby Through
Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. p.93
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. p.93
Standby Sync
Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. p.94
ARC
Enables/disables ARC. p.94
SCENE
Enables/disables SCENE link playback. p.94
En
88
Menu Item Function Page
Sound
DSP Parameter
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. p.95
Panorama
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. p.95
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. p.95
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. p.95
Center Image
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. p.95
Lipsync
Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. p.96
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. p.96
Dialogue Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. p.96
Volume
Scale
Switches the scale of the volume display. p.96
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. p.96
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume. p.97
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. p.97
ZoneB Volume
Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. p.97
ECO
Auto Power Standby
Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. p.98
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). p.98
Function
Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. p.99
Input Skip
Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key. p.100
Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display. p.100
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings. p.100
Remote Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. p.101
Network
Information
Displays the network information on the unit. p.102
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method. p.102
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). p.102
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. p.103
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. p.103
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. p.103
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. p.104
Network Update
Updates the firmware via the network. p.104
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. p.104
Audio Receive
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. p.64
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). p.104
Audio Send
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. p.105
Device Search
Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. p.65
Language
Select an on-screen menu language. p.105
En
89
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
n
Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
Note
When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6‑1/4”)
or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6‑
1/4”).
Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are
possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connections.
Settings
Surround
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connections).
BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-
amp connections (
p.77).
Zone B
Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (
p.78) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A).
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Settings
Use
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “
Crossover
”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Note
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-
frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
En
90
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-
frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Crossover
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “
Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified
value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz,
80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
Note
If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear,
switch the subwoofer phase.
Settings
Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
Off Disables Extra Bass.
On Enables Extra Bass.
Note
You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.49).
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
configuration.
Settings
Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.
On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.
Note
▪ Select “On” only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.15).
▪ This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
n
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
En
91
n
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB
n
Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
EQ Select
Selects the type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
PEQ
Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.
29).
GEQ
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Off Does not use the equalizer.
Note
“PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.29).
n
Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor
keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band
(frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
n
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
En
92
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
n
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.124).
Settings
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and
“SCENE”.
Note
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.124) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
n
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
Note
This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On Enables the audio output from the speakers.
HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
n
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Off
(When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Auto
Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on the
status of the connected device.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “
Off” is selected.)
n
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–2, AV 1–4
Default
AV 2
Note
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
En
93
n
Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit
is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
n
ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off Disables ARC.
On Enables ARC.
Note
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off”
and use the TV’s speakers.
n
SCENE
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected
to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.
• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD / DVD, TV, NET, RADIO
Settings
Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
Default
BD / DVD, TV: On
NET, RADIO: Off
Note
SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using
TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.
En
94
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
n
DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.46). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA
DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch
Stereo).
Settings
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Panorama
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function
is enabled, you can wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and
generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Settings
Off Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 3 to 7
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher
to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound
field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
-3 to
0 to +3
Center Image
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field.
Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower
to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music
”
is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to
0.3 to 1.0
En
95
n
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Note
You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync (Lipsync)” (p.85) in the “Option”
menu.
Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Note
“Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “
Select” is set to
“Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
n
Dialogue
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of the center orientation sounds such as dialogue.
Setting range
0 to 3 (higher to strengthen)
n
Volume
Configures the volume settings.
Scale
Switches the scale of the volume display.
Settings
dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0).
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital
and DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Min/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
En
96
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments),
+16.5 dB [50.0 to 95.0 (5.0 increments),
97.0]
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0
(0.5 increments)]
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
ZoneB Volume
Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for
Zone A.
Settings
Sync.
Adjusts the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone
A.
Async.
Does not adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume
for Zone A. Adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.80).
Note
If “ZoneB Volume” is set to “Async.”, the volume for Zone B is temporarily set to -40 dB. As necessary,
adjust the volume using the remote control (p.
80).
En
97
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
n
Auto Power Standby
Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
Settings
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time.
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off
Note
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
n
ECO Mode
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting the eco mode to “On”. After
setting, be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
Off Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
Note
▪ When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
▪ If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
En
98
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
n
Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. You can also select a
name from the presets or a name created by the Auto Rename function.
Input sources
HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, USB, Bluetooth, AUX
Default
HDMI 1-4: Auto
Others: Manual (For USB, Bluetooth, AUX only “Manual” can be selected.)
Procedure to rename automatically
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be
renamed.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto”.
The unit creates a name automatically according to the connected
device.
3
To check a created name, press ENTER.
Note
During selecting “Auto”, the created name is saved even after the device connection is
terminated. To reset to the default setting, switch the setting to “
Manual” at once and then set
it again to “
Auto”.
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Procedure to rename manually
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be
renamed.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Manual” and press
ENTER.
Note
To select the preset name, use the cursor keys (e/r).
3
Press ENTER.
The edit screen is displayed.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then
select “OK” to confirm the new name.
Note
To cancel the entry, select “CANCEL”.
5
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4.
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
99
n
Input Skip
Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key.
You can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.
Input sources
HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX
Settings
Off Does not skip the selected input source.
On Skips the selected input source.
n
Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Note
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.98) is set to “On”.
n
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
Off Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Note
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
En
100
n
Remote Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.
Settings
Default
Assigns the functions of playback devices connected to the unit with an
HDMI cable.
Input
Assigns the unit's input sources to each key. The assigned input sources
can be set separately.
Input sources
HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX
Default
RED: HDMI2, GREEN: HDMI4, YELLOW: AV 2, BLUE: AUX
Program
Assigns the functions of sound mode to each key.
RED: MOVIE
GREEN: MUSIC
YELLOW: STEREO
BLUE: SUR.DECODE
For example, if you press the RED key repeatedly, you can select your
favorite sound program from the sound programs (MOVIE
) (p.46) suitable
for the video source.
En
101
Network
Configures the network settings.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
n
Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Connection Connection method
SSID The access point to which the unit is connected
Security The encryption method for your network
MusicCast Network Readiness or not for the MusicCast Network
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)
n
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Choices
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable.
Wireless(Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network”
(p.34).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the
unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device
to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.39).
n
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
n
Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the
cursor keys (q/w) to select a value.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
102
n
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Note
Operation of the AirPlay function (p.66) or the DMC is not limited by this setting.
Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
n
Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (
q/w) to select an MAC address number
(1 to 10).
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the
cursor keys (q/w) to select a value.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
n
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Settings
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable Allows DMCs to control playback.
Note
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
n
Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
En
103
n
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then
select “OK” to confirm the new name.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
n
Network Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
Perform Update
Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the
unit’s firmware via the network” (p.109).
Firmware Version
Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
System ID
Displays the system ID number.
Bluetooth
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
n
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.64).
Settings
Off Disables the Bluetooth function.
On Enables the Bluetooth function.
n
Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio
receiver.
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth
devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically
turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Note
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.103) is set to “Off”.
En
104
n
Audio Send
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio
transmitter.
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using
Bluetooth speakers/headphones (p.
65).
Settings
Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Note
Default settings are underlined.
Settings
English English
日本語 Japanese
Français French
Deutsch German
Español Spanish
Русский Russian
Italiano Italian
中文 Chinese
Note
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
105
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z (power).
(power)
z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Note
Default settings are underlined.
Item Function Page
SP IMP.
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
p.106
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. p.107
TU
(Asia, Taiwan and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
p.107
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. p.107
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. p.107
INIT Restores the default settings. p.108
UPDATE Updates the firmware. p.108
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. p.108
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.
8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
En
106
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
REMOTE ID••ID1
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with
a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1, ID2
n
Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down
SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds.
To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down
SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia, Taiwan and General models only)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TU••••FM50/AM9
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps
and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TV FORMAT•NTSC
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Taiwan and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
4K MODE•MODE 2
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be
displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.
Note
When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.
En
107
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
INIT••••CANCEL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
UPDATE•••••USB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
n
Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and
press INFO to start firmware update.
Choices
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
VERSION••xx.xx
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
Note
▪ You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu.
▪ It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
En
108
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the
firmware via the network and update it.
Notice
▪ Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update.
Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed).
▪ If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network
update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update
the firmware using the USB memory device (
p.108).
▪ To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the
update from the “ADVANCED SETUP
” menu (p.108).
▪
For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Note
You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
(p.108).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after SETUP is
pressed.
CANCEL
RETURN
Network Setup
New firmware available.
Press ENTER to update now.
(You can also start the update
from the "Setup-Network"
screen.)
Language <English>
You can switch the language.
1
Read the on-screen description and press ENTER.
2
To start the firmware update, press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the
front display, press z (power) on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
En
109
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The frequently asked questions from customers and the answers are shown below.
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.29). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.
90).
We want to set limitations on the volume control...
If someone accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “
Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
maximum volume level for the unit in advance (
p.97).
I want to fix the volume when turning on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “
Initial Volume
” in the “Setup” menu to set
the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.97).
The volume varies depending on the input sources...
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.85).
HDMI Control does not work at all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.124). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to change the input source name...
By default, input source names (such as “HDMI1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the
front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,
use “Input Rename” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the
presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard
” in the “Setup” menu (p.100).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha
product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (
p.107).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when
the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/
audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby
mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to “On”
or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit
when this function is enabled.
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external
device...
Use “Audio In” in the “
Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input
jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (
p.23).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “
Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output
(p.
96
).
En
110
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals
input into the unit (p.93). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination.
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese,
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (
p.
28).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware
(p.108).
En
111
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
1
The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
2
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
3
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator
on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the
unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.
19).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.98).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.106).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.
19
).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the
unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and plug it again.)
En
112
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.107).
The remote control is set to the Zone B operation mode. Set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode (p.80).
Cannot select the desired input source even if
“INPUT” is pressed.
The function which skips some input sources is set. Set “Input Skip” of the desired input source in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.100).
The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the
remote control do not operate.
The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not
support the operation of the RED/GREEN/
YELLOW/BLUE keys.
Use a device which supports the operation of the
RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE
keys.
The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's
remote control have been changed.
Set the “Remote Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default” (p.101).
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the
audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (
p.
85).
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.
Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output
to Zone A (or Zone B).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.97).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.85).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.92).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.90).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (
p.92).
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.
Slide the Zone switch to “
ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output
to Zone A (or Zone B).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
En
113
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE)
or low-frequency signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.91).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (
p.29) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.90).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS
terminals.
In “Audio Output
” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.93).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from
the speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.21).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.93).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.94). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
When playing back DSD audio, the unit disables
the audio output from a TV.
The unit does not support DSD audio output from a TV. Change the audio output setting on the playback device to PCM.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.85). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off
” (p.98).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
En
114
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info.
” in the “
Option” menu (p.85). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.126).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2 -
compatible HDMI device) from the playback
device connected to the unit with HDMI.
The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2. (The
Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.)
Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected
with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (
p.21 to
p.
22).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
En
115
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-V481)
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
To select monaural FM radio reception “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to
“
Mono” (p.50).
Use an outdoor FM antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (
p.50).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.50).
Use an outdoor AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (
p.52).
DAB radio (RX-V481D)
Problem Cause Remedy
No DAB radio reception.
An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.55).
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.59), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.59), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service
or may not provide information.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
No DAB radio sound.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
En
116
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.102). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.102).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.71).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter
” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (
p.103).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.
71).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.103).
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.108).
The mobile device does not recognize the unit
when using AirPlay or AV CONTROLLER.
The unit and the mobile device are connected to different SSID
when using a multiple SSID router.
Connect them to the Primary SSID (at the top of the list).
En
117
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
Bluetooth®
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.104).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection
(p.64).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (
p.64).
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.
64
).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En
118
Error indications on the front display
Refer to the table below when the error message is indicated on the front display.
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.71).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.26).
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Not connected
The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly.
The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.107).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see
“Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)”
(p.71). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En
119
Glossary
This is a glossary of the technical terms used in this manual.
Audio information
n
Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that
supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that
supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray Disc).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes
available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode”
for game sources.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to
offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD
can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)
simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit
audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a
higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This
technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD
(Blu-ray Disc).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that
supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully
compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio
can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)
simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS Neo: 6
DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides
discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as
SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224
MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of
120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed
audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies,
this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio
streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while
maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted.
This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio
format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray Disc).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog
audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the
sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be
played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound
level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the
sound level is more accurate.
En
120
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data
obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but
you can also use other compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With
psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate.
Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of
audio quality.
n
Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to
120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance
low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency
audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing
caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically
correcting the timing lag between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are
combined and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of
available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional
color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16
bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle
gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/
video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the
HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color
space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While
remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or
connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the
complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products
that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters,
their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects.
Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so
widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of
actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images.
CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so
that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression
music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the
overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate
representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround
speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the
unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room.
En
121
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field
without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit
creates the 3D sound field in your room.
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections,
measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes
the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.
Supported devices and file formats
The following devices and file formats can be used by the unit.
Supported devices
n
Bluetooth® devices
• Bluetooth devices that support A2DP can be used.
• Yamaha does not assure the connections of all Bluetooth devices.
n
USB devices
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or
portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
n
AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini, iPad (3rd and 4th generation),
iPad 2
iPod touch (5th generation)
(as of April 2016)
En
122
File formats
n
USB, PC/NAS
File
Sampling
frequency
(kHz)
quantization
bit (bit)
Bitrate (kbps)
Number of
channels
Support for
gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 - 2
4
MP3
32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
WMA
32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
FLAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 - 2
4
ALAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96
16/24 - 2
4
AIFF
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 - 2
4
DSD
2.8 MHz/
5.6 MHz
1 - 2 -
* Linear PCM format only
• To play back FLAC files stored on your PC/NAS, you need to install server software
that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports
FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
HDMIHDMI
VIDEOVIDEO
HDMI HDMI
VIDEO VIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI connection
Composite video connection
HDMI in HDMI out
VIDEO in VIDEO out
En
123
Information on HDMI
The additional information on HDMI is as follows.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit
(such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control
playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to
the unit with an HDMI cable.
n
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in
tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
HDMI Control HDMI Control
The unit turns off
(standby)
Playback device
also turns off
Turn off the TV
n
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.
44)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations)
(Example)
HDMI Control HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Note
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
1
Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
2
Press SETUP.
MUTE
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
ENTER
TUNING
PRESET
MUTE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAYRETURN
SETUP
OPTION
FM/AM
VOLUME
PROGR AM
USB
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER BASS
INPU T
BD
DVD
TV
SC ENE
RADIO
SLEEP
ENTER
BLUE
YELLOWGREEN
RED
DIRECT
ZONE A ZONE B
NET
NET
BLUETOOTH
MUTE
TO
P MENU
HOME
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLA
Y
DISPLA
DISPLA
RETURN
OPTION
OPTION
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En
124
3
Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Back
RETURN
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys
(e/r) to select “On” as shown below.
Back
RETURN
HDMI
HDMI Control On
Audio Output
TV Audio Input AV2
Standby Sync Auto
ARC On
SCENE
5
If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the
unit, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “TV Audio Input” and the
cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO1”.
6
Press SETUP.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is
selected. If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by
turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote
control.
Note
▪ If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
▪ If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting
on the TV.
▪ If you reconnect the HDMI cable, perform the procedure 5-8 again.
▪ We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
En
125
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically
switched to “AV 2” and the TV audio will be played back on the
unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
▪ “ARC” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
▪ The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI
jack marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer
to the instruction manual for the TV.
Note
▪ If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (
p.
21).
▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
▪ “AV 2” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 2 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.
44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).
HDMI signal compatibility
n
Audio signals
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
n
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
Note
▪ When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
▪ The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for each device.
▪ To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback
device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
En
126
Trademarks
The trademarks used in this manual are as follows.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS,
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory
Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that
an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically
to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or
iPad may affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media
Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance
®
.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Yamaha Corporation is under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
(For RX-V481D)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha
Corporation.
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/
LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL
license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/)
.
En
127
Specifications
The specifications of this unit are as follows.
Input jacks
Analog Audio
• Audio x 4
Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
• Optical x 1
• Coaxial x 2
Video
• Composite x 4
HDMI Input
• HDMI x 4
Other jacks
• USB x 1 (USB2.0)
• NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
• NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
Output jacks
Analog Audio
• Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R*)
* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B]
• Subwoofer Out x 1
• Headphone x 1
Video
• Composite x 1
HDMI Output
• HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
YPAO MIC x 1
HDMI
HDMI Features:
• 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit), 3D Video, ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI
Control (CEC), Auto Lip Sync, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”, HD audio playback, 21:9 Aspect Ratio,
BT.2020 Colorimetry, HDR Compatible
Video Format (Repeater Mode)
• VGA
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Audio Format
• Dolby TrueHD
• Dolby Digital Plus
• Dolby Digital
• DTS-HD Master Audio
• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
• DTS Express
• DTS
• DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
• PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
Content Protection: HDCP 2.2 compatible
Link Function: CEC supported
En
128
TUNER
Analog Tuner
• [RX-V481 U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
• [RX-V481 Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
• [RX-V481D U.K. and Europe models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
• [RX-V481D Other models]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
Bluetooth
Sink Function
• Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Supported profile
– A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported codec
– SBC, AAC
Source Function
• AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)
• Supported profile
– A2DP
• Supported codec
– SBC
Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
Bluetooth version
• Ver. 2.1+EDR
Wireless output
• Bluetooth Class 2
Maximum communication distance
• 10 m (33 ft) without interference
Network
PC Client Function
Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
AirPlay supported
Internet Radio
Wi-Fi function
• Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
• Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
• Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
• Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
• Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz
• Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Compatible Decoding Formats
Decoding Format
• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
• Dolby Digital
• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
• DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Post Decoding Format
• Dolby Pro Logic
• Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game
• DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema
En
129
Audio Section
Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
• [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω)
– Front L/R 80 W+80 W
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
– Front L/R 95 W+95 W
– Center 95 W
– Surround L/R 95 W+95 W
Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
– Front L/R 115 W/ch
– Center 115 W/ch
– Surround L/R 115 W/ch
Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
• [U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
140 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
145 W/ch
• [Other models] (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 135 W/ch
Dynamic Power (IHF)
• [U.S.A. and Canada models]
– Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)
110/130/160/180 W
• [Other models]
– Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω)
110/130/160 W
Damping Factor
• Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω
100 or more
Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω) 200 mV/47 kΩ
Maximum Input Signal
• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) 2.3 V
Output Level / Output Impedance
• SUBWOOFER
1 V/1.2 kΩ
Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) 100 mV/470 Ω
Frequency Response
• AV 2 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) +0/-3 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
• AV 2 etc. (DIRECT) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
110 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
• Front L/R (Speaker Out) 150 μV or less
Channel Separation
• AV 2 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
70 dB/50 dB or more
Volume Control
• Range MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
• Step 0.5 dB
Tone Control Characteristics
• Bass Boost/Cut ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
• Bass Turnover 350 Hz
• Treble Boost/Cut ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
• Treble Turnover 3.5 kHz
Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
• H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) 12 dB/oct.
• L.P.F. (Subwoofer) 24 dB/oct.
En
130
Video Section
Video Signal Type
• [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] NTSC
• [Other models] PAL
Video Signal Level
• Composite
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Video Maximum Input Level
1.5 Vp-p or more
Video Signal to Noise Ratio
50 dB or more
FM Section
Tuning Range
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
• [Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
• [Other models] 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
• Mono 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
• Mono 65 dB
• Stereo 64 dB
Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
• Mono 0.5%
• Stereo 0.6%
Antenna Input
75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (RX-V481)
Tuning Range
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
• [Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
• [Other models] 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB Section (RX-V481D)
Tuning Range
174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
Support Audio Format
MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+)
Antenna
75 Ω unbalanced
General
Power Supply
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] AC 120 V, 60 Hz
• [Taiwan, Brazil and General model] AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• [China model] AC 220 V, 50 Hz
• [Korea model] AC 220 V, 60 Hz
• [Australia model] AC 240 V, 50 Hz
• [U.K. and Europe models] AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• [Asia model] AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
260 W
Standby Power Consumption
• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off 0.1 W
• HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby Off 0.9 W
• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth
Standby Off
– Wired 1.8 W
– Wireless (Wi-Fi) 1.9 W
– Wireless Direct 2.0 W
• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired),
Bluetooth Standby On
1.8 W
• HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
2.4 W
Maximum Power Consumption
• [Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] 600 W
En
131
Dimensions (W x H x D)
435 x 161 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-7/8”)
Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright)
* Including legs and protrusions
435 x 225.5 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 8-7/8” x 12-7/8”)
Weight
8.1 kg (17.9 lbs)
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain
the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file.
En
132
Yamaha Global Site
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Department
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
Published 02/2016 NV-B0
YH632A0/EN1
Documenttranscriptie
AV Receiver Owner's Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. EN CONTENTS BEFORE USING THE UNIT 5 4 Accessories................................................................................................ 5 DAB/FM antenna (RX-V481D)............................................................................................................................................ 25 5 How to use this manual............................................................................ 5 Preparing a wireless antenna............................................................................................................................................ 26 Insert the batteries................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Operating range of the remote control........................................................................................................................... 5 6 6 Connecting the power cable............................................................ 27 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................... 28 8 What you can do with the unit................................................................. 6 Warning messages................................................................................................................................................................ 32 9 Front panel................................................................................................................................................................................. 9 Rear panel................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Connecting the unit to a wireless network.................................................................................................................. 34 Remote control....................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)...................................................................... 39 PREPARATIONS 10 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................... 41 13 MusicCast CONTROLLER..................................................................................................................................................... 41 Adding the unit to the MusicCast network.................................................................................................................. 41 Placing speakers............................................................................... 14 PLAYBACK Typical speaker layouts....................................................................................................................................................... 15 Other speaker layouts.......................................................................................................................................................... 16 42 Setting the speaker impedance....................................................................................................................................... 17 Basic playback procedure...................................................................... 42 Connecting speakers........................................................................ 18 Enjoying playback................................................................................................................................................................. 42 Switching information on the front display................................................................................................................. 43 Connecting speaker cables................................................................................................................................................ 19 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 19 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE).................................................................................................... 44 Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 19 Selecting a registered scene.............................................................................................................................................. 44 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................. 20 Registering a scene............................................................................................................................................................... 44 Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)................................................................................................. 19 3 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................ 33 Selecting the connection method................................................................................................................................... 33 Front display (indicators).................................................................................................................................................... 10 2 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................ 29 Error messages....................................................................................................................................................................... 31 Part names and functions......................................................................... 9 1 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................... 26 Connecting a network cable............................................................................................................................................. 26 Remote control.......................................................................................... 5 FEATURES Connecting the radio antennas....................................................... 25 FM/AM antennas (RX-V481)............................................................................................................................................... 25 Input/output jacks and cables.......................................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting a TV..................................................................................................................................................................... 21 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players).............................................................................................. 22 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)......................................................................................................... 24 Connecting to the jack on the front panel................................................................................................................... 24 2 En Selecting the sound mode..................................................................... 45 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)............................................................................................ 46 Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections .................................................................................................................. 77 Enjoying unprocessed playback...................................................................................................................................... 48 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 77 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)................................................................................................. 49 Playing back music in multiple rooms.................................................. 78 Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)....................................................................................................................................... 49 Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 78 Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)..................................................................................................................................................................... 49 Operating the Zone B........................................................................................................................................................... 79 Useful functions...................................................................................... 81 Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)..................................................... 50 Registering favorite items (shortcut).............................................................................................................................. 81 Setting the frequency steps............................................................................................................................................... 50 Registering favorite radio stations (presets)................................................................................................................ 51 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)......................................................................................... 83 Radio Data System tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 54 Option menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 83 Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 50 Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)....................................................... 55 CONFIGURATIONS Preparing the DAB tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 55 Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................................. 56 87 Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)...................................................................................................... 57 Configuring various functions (Setup Menu)....................................... 87 Displaying the DAB information...................................................................................................................................... 58 Setup menu items................................................................................................................................................................. 88 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label....................................................................................... 59 Speaker...................................................................................................................................................................................... 90 Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)......................................................... 60 HDMI........................................................................................................................................................................................... 93 Sound......................................................................................................................................................................................... 95 Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 60 ECO............................................................................................................................................................................................. 98 Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................................... 60 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................... 99 Radio Data System tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 63 Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 102 Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device.............................. 64 Bluetooth............................................................................................................................................................................... 104 Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit........................................................................................................... 64 Language............................................................................................................................................................................... 105 Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/headphones....................................................................................... 65 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 106 Playing back music with AirPlay............................................................ 66 ADVANCED SETUP menu items..................................................................................................................................... 106 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents...................................................................................................................... 66 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.).............................................................................................. 106 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device............................ 68 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID).......................................................................................................... 107 Connecting a USB storage device................................................................................................................................... 68 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)............................................................................................ 107 Playback of USB storage device contents..................................................................................................................... 68 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)......................................................................................................... 107 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)...................... 71 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE).................................................................................................... 107 Restoring the default settings (INIT)............................................................................................................................. 108 Media sharing setup............................................................................................................................................................. 71 Updating the firmware (UPDATE)................................................................................................................................. 108 Playback of PC music contents......................................................................................................................................... 72 Checking the firmware version (VERSION)................................................................................................................. 108 Listening to Internet radio..................................................................... 74 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network................................... 109 Playback of Internet radio.................................................................................................................................................. 74 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)....................................................................................... 76 3 En APPENDIX 110 Frequently asked questions................................................................ 110 Troubleshooting................................................................................... 112 First, check the following:................................................................................................................................................ 112 Power, system and remote control............................................................................................................................... 112 Audio....................................................................................................................................................................................... 113 Video........................................................................................................................................................................................ 115 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-V481)........................................................................... 116 DAB radio (RX-V481D)....................................................................................................................................................... 116 USB and network................................................................................................................................................................. 117 Bluetooth®............................................................................................................................................................................. 118 Error indications on the front display................................................. 119 Glossary................................................................................................. 120 Audio information.............................................................................................................................................................. 120 HDMI and video information.......................................................................................................................................... 121 Network information......................................................................................................................................................... 121 Yamaha technologies........................................................................................................................................................ 121 Supported devices and file formats.................................................... 122 Supported devices.............................................................................................................................................................. 122 File formats............................................................................................................................................................................ 123 Video signal flow.................................................................................. 123 Information on HDMI........................................................................... 124 HDMI Control........................................................................................................................................................................ 124 Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................................................................................................................... 126 HDMI signal compatibility............................................................................................................................................... 126 Trademarks........................................................................................... 127 Specifications........................................................................................ 128 4 En BEFORE USING THE UNIT Accessories Remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. The supplied remote control is used as follows. £ AM antenna (RX-V481) Insert the batteries £ FM antenna (RX-V481) Insert the batteries the right way round. * One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. £ DAB/FM antenna (RX-V481D) £ YPAO microphone Operating range of the remote control Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. £ Remote control £ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) £ CD-ROM (Owner's Manual) £ Easy Setup Guide £ Safety Brochure Within 6 m (20 ft) £ MusicCast Setup Guide 30° How to use this manual • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-V481 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. Notice: Indicates precautions for use to avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the unit. Note: Indicates instructions and supplementary explanations for optimum use. 5 En 30° FEATURES What you can do with the unit The unit is equipped with full of useful functions. Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system You can enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. YPAO automatically optimizes the speaker settings to suit your room. • “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.29) CINEMA DSP allows you to create stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls in your own room. • “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)” (p.46) You can enjoy compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer). Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) The SCENE function allows you to select the input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene, such as sound program and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, with just one touch. • “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)” (p.44) 4K Ultra HD signal and HDCP 2.2 supported You can enjoy the high definition video quality of 4K with HDCP 2.2 that complies with the latest copyright protection. • “Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)” (p.107) Wide variety of supported content via network When the unit is connected to a network by establishing a wired or wireless connection, you can enjoy various contents via network on the unit. You can select a wired or wireless connection to a network. • “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.26) • “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.33) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/ NAS)” (p.71) You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. • “Listening to Internet radio” (p.74) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit via network. • “Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)” (p.49) • “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.66) The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). • “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78) 6 En The ECO mode (power saving function) allows you to create an eco-friendly home theater system Connecting various devices Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front When the ECO mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit's power consumption. A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, portable audio player, and other devices. • “ECO Mode” (p.98) • “Connecting a TV/playback devices” (p.20) Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. Enhanced bass reproduction When the unit is connected to an HDMI Controlcompatible TV and BD/DVD player with each HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) and BD/DVD player with TV remote control operations. • “HDMI Control” (p.124) Supports Bluetooth® devices You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth device. • “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device” (p.64) Supports USB storage devices You can play back music stored on a USB storage device. • “Connecting a TV” (p.21) Creating 3-dimensional sound fields The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you to create a 3-dimensional sound field that spreads up and deep in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). • “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)” (p.46) • “Playing back music stored on a USB storage device” (p.68) 7 En You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. • “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.47) Enjoying pure high fidelity sound • “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)” (p.49) Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass reproduction that does not depend on the speakers used. • “Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)” (p.49) Listening to FM/AM radio (RXV481) The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. • “Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)” (p.50) Listening to DAB/FM radio (RXV481D) The unit is equipped with a built-in DAB/FM tuner. DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. Useful applications The useful application for connections and operations of the unit is as follows. AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV Receiver and source devices as well as AV Receiver setup. This app guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and source device connections and assigning the power amp. Easy operation with a TV screen Functions: • Power on/off • Volume up/down • Mute • Music Play Functions: • Input Selection 1) Connection support guide – Speaker connection – TV/source devices connection • DSP Mode Selection The unit automatically creates input source names according to the HDMI-compatible devices connected, and displays the respective input source names on the front display. 2) Setup support guide – Automatic network setup of HDMI, power amp assign, etc. – Various setup assistance with illustrations. – YPAO setting guidance • “Input Rename” (p.99) 3) View Owner's Manual Home Audio Network with MusicCast * This application is for tablets only. The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play them back simultaneously, or control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”. AV CONTROLLER is an application that assists you with various operations of AV Receiver without the remote control. This app allows you not only to control the unit’s power and volume but also to select the input source and start/stop playback, as shown below. GUIDE” • “Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)” (p.60) Auto Rename function tablets “AV CONTROLLER” n Application for tablets “AV SETUP • “Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)” (p.55) You can operate the USB storage device, view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. n Application for smartphone / For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play™. • “Setting the MusicCast” (p.41) 8 En • SCENE selection • Blu-ray player fundamental control • Seamless control between the Yamaha AV Receiver and Blu-ray player • Demo mode - Explains how to use this app For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. Part names and functions The part names and functions of the unit and the supplied remote control are as follows. Front panel 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A DIRECT YPAO MIC INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL NET TV RADIO STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA B AUX USB AUDIO 5V (CONNECT) C D E F G H 1A I J (RX-V481 U.S.A. model) 1 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.93) • Standby Through is enabled (p.93) • Network Standby is enabled (p.103) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.29). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 5 INFO (WPS) key Select a preset radio station (p.53). 8 FM and AM keys (RX-V481) or FM and DAB keys (RXV481D) Switch between FM and AM (p.50) or FM and DAB (p.55). 9 TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.50). Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.49). B PHONES jack Registers radio stations as preset stations (p.51). Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.48). For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.24). I USB jack For connecting headphones. D TONE CONTROL key Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.45). H AUX jack A DIRECT key Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.35). F PROGRAM keys Enters the MusicCast network addition and the wireless LAN setup by holding down for 5 seconds (p.41). Displays information (p.10). C INPUT keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.44). G STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key : Front display Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.43). 6 MEMORY key E SCENE keys 7 PRESET keys For connecting a USB storage device (p.68). J VOLUME knob Select an input source. Adjusts the volume. Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and lowfrequency range (Bass) individually (p.84). 9 En Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE 6 5 OUT 1 2 ECO 7 8 PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 9 0 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) is working. 3 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.46) or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.46) is working. 4 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. : Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. A Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.43). B Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.33). C ZONE indicators Indicate the zone to which the sound is output (p.80). D Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. TUNED A Front speaker (L) Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station (RX-V481) or FM radio station (RX-V481D) signal. S Front speaker (R) 5 Bluetooth indicator Light up while the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device. 6 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 7 MUTE Blinks when audio is temporarily muted. B A D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) L Subwoofer E ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.84) is working. 8 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 9 ECO Lights up when the eco mode (p.98) is enabled. 10 En C 0 D E Rear panel 3 2 1 4 6 5 LESS HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 (NET) ARC 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 4 ANTENNA FM (RADIO) AM 75 Ω SPEAKERS CENTER FRONT VIDEO OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B MONITOR OUT AV 2 AV 3 7 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AV 4 8 9 0 A (RX-V481 U.S.A. model) ▪ The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 1 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.20). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 2 HDMI 1–4 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.21). 3 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to the radio antennas (p.25). 4 NETWORK jack For a wired connection to a network (p.26). 5 Wireless antenna 7 AV jacks AUDIO jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.22). 8 MONITOR OUT jack For connecting to a TV and outputting video signals (p.20). 9 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.18). : SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.18). A VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Taiwan, Brazil and General models only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.27). For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.26). 6 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.27). 11 En Remote control 1 1 Remote control signal transmitter Transmits infrared signals. 2 3 2 SLEEP key ZONE A ZONE B A SLEEP SCENE 4 BD DVD TV STRAIGHT DIRECT 5 NET RADIO Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode. 3 ZONE switch ENHANCER BASS Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.79). PROGRAM USB 6 INPUT VOLUME NET B MUTE 7 SETUP OPTION ENTER 8 RETURN TOP MENU DISPLAY HOME Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.44). 5 Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.45). BLUETOOTH POP-UP/MENU C D 6 Input selection keys GREEN YELLOW BLUE 0 TUNING TUNING PRESET ▪ The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI Control-compatible devices cannot be used. ▪ You can assign the unit's functions to the RED/GREEN/ YELLOW/BLUE keys (p.101). Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.50). MEMORY Registers radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. Turns on/off (standby) the unit. You can select directly each input source by pressing the following keys. B VOLUME keys FM/AM or FM/DAB FM/AM radio (RX-V481) or FM/DAB radio (RX-V481D) C MUTE key USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET SERVER, NET RADIO, MusicCast Link, AirPlay and network sources (press repeatedly to select a desired source) BLUETOOTH Bluetooth device 7 SETUP key MEMORY Note A z (receiver power) key Select an input source for playback. 9 RED Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device. : Radio keys 4 SCENE keys FM/AM 89: External device operation keys Displays the setup menu (p.87). 8 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or the parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. ( RX-V481 ) 12 En Adjust the volume. Mutes the audio output. D OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.83). PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers................................................................................................................................ (p.14) 2 Connecting speakers........................................................................................................................ (p.18) 3 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................................................................. (p.20) 4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................................................................... (p.25) 5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................................................................... (p.26) 6 Connecting the power cable............................................................................................................ (p.27) 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................................................................... (p.28) 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................................................................ (p.29) 9 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................................................................ (p.33) 10 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................................................................... (p.41) This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! 13 En 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Notice ▪ (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.17). ▪ (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 W. ▪ Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. ▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers. 14 En Typical speaker layouts n 5.1-channel system n 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) We recommend this speaker layout which can maximize the performance of the unit. We recommend this speaker layout when the speakers can't be placed in back of the room. 1 1 2 2 4 9 9 3 4 5 10° to 30° Speaker type Front (L/R) Center Surround (L/R) Subwoofer 5 3 Abbr. 1/2 3 4/5 9 10° to 30° Speaker type Function Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Front (L/R) Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Center Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround (L/R) Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. Subwoofer This channel is counted as “0.1”. Abbr. 1/2 3 4/5 9 Function Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround left/right channel sounds. By this system, place the surround speakers in front. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. Note Note ▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). ▪ To utilize this configuration, set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. ▪ You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side. ▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). ▪ You can place the subwoofer either in the left or right side. 15 En Other speaker layouts The following speaker layouts are also available. n 2.1-channel system n 3.1-channel system 1 9 2 1 3 2 9 Note Note In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.77) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78). In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.77) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78). 16 En Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. 1 2 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. CHARGE OUT 1 2 ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. SP IMP.••8¬MIN 4 5 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. 17 En 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for a 5.1-channel system as an example. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system. Notice ▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. ▪ The speaker has the polarity (+/-). Connect the speaker cable correctly between the positive (+) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and also between the negative (-) terminal of them. Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) + – The unit (rear) Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables LESS S HDMI OUT HDMI HDCP2.2 1(BD/DVD) 2 Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit or the speakers. NETWORK (HDCP2.2) (NET) 1 ARC 3 4 ANTENNA (RADIO) FM 10 mm (3/8”) 2 ▪ Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together. AM 75 Ω SPEAKERS FRONT VIDEO OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B 3 MONITOR OUT AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 4 ▪ Do not let the core wires of the speaker cable touch one another. SUBWOOFER PRE OUT ▪ Do not let the core wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts (rear panel and screws). Audio pin cable Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. 9 Subwoofer 2 Front (R) 1 Front (L) 3 5 4 Center Surround (R) Surround (L) 18 En If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker cables short circuit. Connecting speaker cables Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 1 2 3 4 AV 4 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections Loosen the speaker terminal. Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals. For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.77). Tighten the terminal. Note Surround speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. c + (red) b FR ON T d Connecting Zone B speakers a The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.78). - (black) Using a banana plug Note (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models only) 1 2 Audio pin cable Surround speakers or bi-amp speakers cannot be used during Zone B connections. Tighten the speaker terminal. Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. a FR ON T Banana plug b 19 En 3 Connecting a TV/playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect a Bluetooth device or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting a Bluetooth device (p.64) • Connecting a USB storage device (p.68) n Video jacks HDMI jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. HDMI cable Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. ▪ The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission (through output) features. ▪ Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable Video pin cable n Audio jacks (Stereo mini jack) Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. Digital optical cable Note ▪ Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. (Stereo L/R jacks) VIDEO jacks Input/output jacks and cables n Video/audio jacks AUDIO jacks OPTICAL COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable 20 En Stereo mini-plug cable Connecting a TV n Composite video connection Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. Note n HDMI connection ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. ▪ If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. ▪ If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 Connect the TV to the unit with a video pin cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI LESS HDMI OUT VIDEO (composite video) connection HDMI input (NET) HDMI HDMI ARC 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 Video input (composite video) 4 ANTENNA FM (RADIO) AM MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) 75 Ω SPEAKERS CENTER FRONT SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B VIDEO LESS VIDEO OPTICAL MONITOR OUT HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 O (NET) O V OPTICAL (TV) OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AUDIO 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack 1(BD/DVD) TV SUBWOOFER PRE OUT V MONITOR OUT ARC 2 3 4 ANTENNA FM Audio output (digital optical) (RADIO) AM 75 Ω SPEAKERS FRONT VIDEO SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B OPTICAL O Note CENTER MONITOR OUT O OPTICAL OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 ▪ You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT (TV) AUDIO 1 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box ▪ If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.124). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) ▪ ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. ▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. 21 En TV Audio output (digital optical) Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) n Composite video connection Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Video Note If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.23). Input jacks on the unit Audio Digital coaxial Composite video n HDMI connection AV 1 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 2–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Digital optical You need to change the combination of video/audio input jacks (p.23). Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. Video output (composite video) AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks HDMI 1–4 jacks VIDEO The unit (rear) V V LESS VIDEO The unit (rear) HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 (NET) ARC LESS 1(BD/DVD) HDMI OUT 2 3 FM (NET) (RADIO) AM HDMI OUT jack HDMI ARC 4 ANTENNA NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 Video device 75 Ω 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 SPEAKERS 4 ANTENNA FM (RADIO) FRONT HDMI AM C VIDEO HDMI SPEAKERS VIDEO CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B C MONITOR OUT 75 Ω FRONT CENTER COAXIAL SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B COAXIAL L MONITOR OUT OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 L SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AV 4 L L R R R OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT R Video device AV 1 (COAXIAL) jack or AV 2–4 (AUDIO) jacks Note To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.21). Audio output (digital coaxial or analog stereo) Note If you connect a video device to the unit via composite video connection, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.21). 22 En n Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks 3 If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Press OPTION. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MUTE OPTION PROGRAM FM/AM Input jacks on the unit SETUPP USB INPUT VOLUME OPTION NET Video HDMI Audio Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4 AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) AV 1 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–4 AV 2–4 (AUDIO) Digital optical AV 1–4 (VIDEO) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) BLUETOOTH MUTE SETUP Cursor keys ENTER OPTION ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW DISPLA DISPLAY BLUE MEMORY Composite video TUNING TUNING TOP MENU Necessary setting 4 For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (VIDEO) and AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE V HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 5 V NETWORK (NET) ARC 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO 1” (audio input jack to be used). 4 ANTENNA FM ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Audio In VIDEO LESS HDMI OUT VOL. ECO Video output (composite video) AV 2 (VIDEO) jack (RADIO) CHARGE AM ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT SPEAKERS FRONT VIDEO CENTER Audio••AUDIO 1 SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B Video device MONITOR OUT 6 OPTICAL O COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 O SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack 2 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press OPTION. This completes the necessary settings. (TV) 1 VOL. ECO 75 Ω OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 POP-UP/MENU Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. OUT The unit (rear) HOME PRESET If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Audio output (digital optical) After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. Press INPUT to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 23 En Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jack on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable audio players to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. Audio input jacks on the unit Digital optical AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) AV 1 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo BD DVD INPUT NET TV TONE CONTROL AV 2–4 (AUDIO) PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT AUX USB AUDIO 5V (CONNECT) 1A The unit (rear) The unit (front) LESS HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 (NET) O O ARC OPTICAL 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 OPTICAL 4 ANTENNA FM (RADIO) AM C C 75 Ω SPEAKERS COAXIAL FRONT CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B L VIDEO L COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 Audio device Portable audio player L R OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL L MONITOR OUT If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. R SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AV 1–4 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks R R Note Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) ▪ You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device. ▪ For details on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.68). 24 En 4 Connecting the radio antennas FM/AM antennas (RX-V481) DAB/FM antenna (RX-V481D) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. DAB/FM antenna FM antenna The unit (rear) AM antenna LESS HDMI OUT HDMI HDCP2.2 NETWORK (HDCP2.2) (NET) ARC 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 LESS HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 4 DAB/FM 75 Ω ANTENNA NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) (RADIO) (NET) ARC SPEAKERS 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND BI-AMP /ZONE B ANTENNA FM (RADIO) AM VIDEO 75 Ω SPEAKERS FRONT VIDEO CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B MONITOR OUT OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 MONITOR OUT AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT SUBWOOFER PRE OUT The unit (rear) Note ▪ The antenna should be stretched out horizontally. Assembling and connecting the AM antenna Hold down Insert ▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM antenna. Release Note ▪ Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. ▪ The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. 25 En 5 Preparing for connecting to a network Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. Note You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. ▪ If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.102). Connecting a network cable ▪ You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu. Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). ▪ Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. ▪ Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet ▪ To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Preparing a wireless antenna WAN PC LAN If you connect the unit wirelessly, erect the wireless antenna. Modem For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.33). Wireless router Erect the wireless antenna. Network cable LESS HDMI OUT S WIRELES NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 (NET) ARC 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 4 ANTENNA FM (RADIO) AM 75 Ω SPEAKERS The unit (rear) VIDEO FRONT CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B MONITOR OUT Note OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna. SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 26 En 6 Connecting the power cable Warning (Taiwan, Brazil and General models only) Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. Before connecting the power cable Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110– 120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The unit (rear) LESS NETWORK (NET) 4 VOLTAGE SELECTOR M SPEAKERS CENTER FRONT SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B VOLTAGE SELECTOR 110V 120V ONITOR OUT 220V 240V SUBWOOFER PRE OUT After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) LESS NETWORK (NET) To an AC wall outlet SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B R SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 27 En 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language Select the desired on-screen menu language. 1 2 6 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Note The information on the front display is provided in English only. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. To continue the language setup, press RETURN. 3 4 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. Setup Speaker HDMI Sound ECO Function Network Bluetooth Language RETURN 5 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Back Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. Language English 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Italiano 中文 28 En 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Note Note ▪ When you use the front 5.1-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration (p.15), set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “On” beforehand. Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. ▪ Please note the following when using YPAO. The unit (front) – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. – Do not connect headphones. 1 – Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). 1 2 3 9 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 2 4 5 Note Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 3 Ear height Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT The following screen appears on the TV. Auto Setup 9 Start Exit Power Amp Assign MIN MAX MIN Zone B MAX 1 Note If you are using bi-amp connections or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. 1 29 En “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.90) 5 7 To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. Auto Setup The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. Start Exit < SAVE > Note To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.31). The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. The adjusted speaker settings are applied. Auto Setup Measurement Finished Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK : ENTER 1 2 3 4 Note To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 8 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer) 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level 4 Warning message (if available) Notice ▪ The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). Note ▪ If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.31) or “Warning messages” (p.32). ▪ A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. ▪ If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. 6 Confirm the results displayed on the screen and press ENTER. 30 En Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Auto Setup ERROR E-9 : User Cancel E-2:No Sur. SP Error message (E-2:NO SUR SP) < RETRY > One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. (E-5:NOISY) E-7:No MIC TV screen (E-7:NO MIC) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO E-5:NOISY ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL E-8:No Signal Front display (E-8:NO SIGNAL) n Procedure to handle errors 1 2 E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) Check the content of error message and press ENTER. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To exit the YPAO measurement: 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): 1 An internal error has occurred. Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: 1 The measurement has been Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. canceled. Note Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. 31 En Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. The noise is too loud. 2% E-5:Noisy Remedy Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. Warning message Cause Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Auto Setup Measurement Finished Result W-1:Out of Phase 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m (W-1:PHASE) -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK : ENTER A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Warning message W-1 : Out of Phase Problem speaker (blinks) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO W-1:PHASE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Front display n Procedure to handle warnings W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. Note Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 1 If the speaker is connected correctly: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. 32 En Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is There are significant volume any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, differences between the and then reconnect speaker cable or speakers. correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. To save the measurement results: To discard the measurement result: 3 A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. 1 Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. TV screen 1 2 Remedy 9 Connecting to a network wirelessly Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. n Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. Note You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.8) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. When you connect the unit to a router with a network cable, you need not do this procedure. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. n Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.8) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.39). Note ▪ You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.26) or the wireless LAN connection (p.34). Internet Wireless router ▪ When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any kind of Internet service such as Internet radio. ▪ Also the mobile device cannot connect to the Internet, so we recommend you disconnect the mobile device from the unit. Modem Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.34). Note ▪ You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.26) or Wireless Direct (p.39). ▪ If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. 33 En Connecting the unit to a wireless network 6 There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. Select a connection method according to your environment. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. Network Connection Connection • The connection setting to MusicCast network. – “Setting the MusicCast” (p.41) <Wireless(Wi-Fi)> Connect to router over wired connection. • The connection settings on iOS devices – “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.34) • The WPS button configuration method – “Using the WPS button configuration” (p.35) RETURN • Other connection methods – “Using other connection methods” (p.36) 7 n Sharing the iOS device setting Wireless(Wi-Fi) WPS Button WAC(iOS) Access Point Scan Manual Setting Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. PIN Code Note Perform wireless setup by sharing iOS device's The sharing process will restore the default settings for the following. network settings with this device. ▪ Network settings RETURN ▪ NET presets 8 ▪ Bluetooth settings ▪ Music streaming service accounts Back Read the on-screen description and press ENTER. Note When you use wired network connection, a warning message is displayed on the screen. Disconnect the network cable from the unit, and then press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 9 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the WiFi screen. iOS 9 (example of English version) Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “WAC(iOS)” and press ENTER. Select a setup method. You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch). 1 2 Back Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. The name of the unit 34 En 10 n Using the WPS button configuration Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the settings with the unit. You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. 1 2 Tap here to start setup The network currently selected Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point) and “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. If “Not shared” or “Not connected” appears, press ENTER to repeat from step 5 or try another connection method. 11 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Note ▪ Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not connect to it. In this case, try connection with “Access Point Scan” or “Manual Setting” (p.36). To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ▪ You can use “WPS Button” (p.36) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless connection with the WPS button. About WPS ▪ WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. 35 En n Using other connection methods 7 If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired connection method and press ENTER. Wireless(Wi-Fi) 1 2 Select a setup method. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. WPS Button WAC(iOS) Access Point Scan Manual Setting Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). PIN Code Perform wireless setup by sharing iOS device's network settings Note with this device. Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 5 6 RETURN Back The following connection methods are available. Press SETUP. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. WAC(iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.34). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.37). Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. Manual Setting You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.38). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the WPS PIN code” (p.39). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Network Connection Connection <Wireless(Wi-Fi)> Connect to router over wired connection. RETURN Back Note The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has connected previously. In this case, the message indicating the successful connection will appear. You can ignore this message and proceed to the next step. 36 En 4 Searching for an access point If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. 5 The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. Access Point Scan SSID : Access Point X Security : WPA2-PSK (AES) Security Key : Connect Edit : ENTER RETURN 2 3 Back Press ENTER. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. _ ( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # %& . , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ ` 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @+ - = > ← Aa BKSP Space DEL → a bc de f ghi j k l m n o p q r s t u v wx y z OK CANCEL CLEAR Button functions [¬]/[→]: Moves the cursor left and right. [Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower). [BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one. [Space]: Enters a space. [DEL]: Deletes the selected character. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. 37 En To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 4 Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. Note You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available. 5 Manual Setting Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. SSID : Security : Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. None If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. Security Key : Connect Edit : ENTER RETURN Back _ 1 2 ( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # %& Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and press ENTER. . , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ ` 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @+ - = > ← Aa BKSP Space DEL → a bc de f ghi j k l m Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point. n o p q r s t u v wx y z OK CANCEL CLEAR When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. _ ( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # %& . , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ ` 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @+ - = > ← Aa BKSP Space DEL → a bc de f ghi j k l m n o p q r s t u v wx y z OK When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. CANCEL CLEAR When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from step 1. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. Choices None, WEP, WPA-PSK(AES), Mixed Mode Note If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. 38 En To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) Using the WPS PIN code If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. Note Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. 1 2 PIN Code PIN Code : 00000000 Enter the PIN code into the access point. Press ENTER to start Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note the connection process. Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. RETURN 2 Back 3 4 5 Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). 3 Press ENTER to start the connection process. 6 When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. 4 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless Direct” and press ENTER. Network Connection Connection <Wireless Direct> Establish wireless To exit from the menu, press SETUP. peer-to-peer connection directly with device, without going through home network. Cannot connect to internet. RETURN 39 En Back 7 10 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. Choices This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on the TV screen. None, WPA2-PSK(AES) Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. 11 Note If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. 8 1 2 If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available. 3 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. 12 _ ( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # %& . , : ; _ | / ¥ $ ~ ^ ‘ “ ` 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 @+ - = > ← Aa BKSP Space DEL Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. Note 9 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and press ENTER to save the setting. → a bc de f ghi j k l m n o p q r s t u v wx y z OK CANCEL CLEAR When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. Note Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These information will be needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device. ▪ SSID displayed on the TV screen ▪ Security key you have just entered 40 En Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available access points. When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in step 9. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 10 Setting the MusicCast MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha, allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible products, visit the Yamaha website. 3 Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the on screen instructions, then hold down CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds. • Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”. • Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play them back simultaneously. • Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music streaming services may differ depending on your region and product). CONNECT 4 MusicCast CONTROLLER 5 Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the onscreen instructions to set up the network. Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to playback. Note ▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered. ▪ When the direct playback mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be delivered. To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device. Adding the unit to the MusicCast network Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network. You can also configure the unit’s wireless network settings at once. Note The SSID and security key for your network will be needed. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on your mobile device and tap “Setup”. Note If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”. 41 En PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure Enjoying playback 1 2 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. ▪ “Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481)” (p.50) ▪ “Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D)” (p.55) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. ▪ “Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D)” (p.60) ZONE A ZONE B ▪ “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device” (p.64) SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS PROGRAM ▪ “Playing back music stored on a USB storage device” (p.68) PROGRAM FM/AM Input selection keys USB INPUT ▪ “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.71) VOLUME NET FM/AM BLUETOOTH ▪ “Listening to Internet radio” (p.74) MUTE SETUP RETURN TOP MENU RED USB OPTION INPUT ENTER DISPLAY HOME GREEN YELLOW VOLUME VOLUME ▪ “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.66) NET POP-UP/MENU BLUE 4 BLUETOOTH MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET MUTE MUTE Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note ▪ To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. ▪ To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.84). 42 En Switching information on the front display 1 Currently input source AV Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display items. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE AUX AUDIO VOL. ECO USB ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Audio Decoder SERVER Item name Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) AirPlay About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Bluetooth SLEEP MUTE OUT Item HDMI OUT SLEEP MUTE NET RADIO Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) MusicCast Link DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) VOL. ECO †‡Pro Logic Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information TUNER (FM/AM) (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.54). TUNER (DAB) See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.58) for details. Note Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input group which is shown in the table below and divided by ruled lines. * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. 43 En Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target zones with just one touch. Registering a scene 1 Selecting a registered scene 1 ▪ Select an input source (p.42) Press SCENE. ▪ Select a sound program (p.45) or straight decode (p.48) The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. ZONE A Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. ▪ Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) ▪ Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.79) ZONE B SLEEP 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS PROGRAM ZONE A FM/AM ZONE B USB INPUT SLEEP VOLUME Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. NET CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE BLUETOOTH SCENE MUTE SETUP OPTION OUT BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS SET Complete ENTER RETURN TOP MENU RED DISPLAY HOME GREEN POP-UP/MENU BLUE YELLOW PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING VOL. ECO SCENE TUNING PRESET By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. SCENE Input HDMI1 AUDIO1 NET RADIO TUNER Sound program Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 5ch Stereo 5ch Stereo Compressed Music Enhancer Off On On On SCENE link playback On On Off Off Target zone Zone A Zone A Zone A Zone A Note The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 44 En ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Selecting the sound mode I want to enjoy enhanced bass sounds. The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). ZONE A • Enable Extra Bass by pressing BASS (p.49). I want to enjoy listening to compressed music. ZONE B SLEEP • Enable Compressed Music Enhancer by pressing ENHANCER (p.49). SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS PROGRAM ZONE A FM/AM This mode lets you enjoy compressed music stored on a Bluetooth device or USB storage device with additional depth and breadth (p.49). ZONE B USB INPUT SLEEP VOLUME NET BLUETOOTH SCENE MUTE SETUP OPTION BD DVD TV NET Note RADIO ENTER RETURN TOP MENU RED DISPLAY HOME GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS POP-UP/MENU PROGRAM TUNING PRESET ▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS PROGRAM ▪ When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.48) is automatically selected. ▪ You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10). I want to enjoy viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, or games. • Select a sound program suitable for each video source by pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.46). I want to enjoy listening to music sources or stereo playback. • Select a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback by pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.47). I want to enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. • Select a surround decoder in the “Option” menu (p.83). I want to enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels. • Switch to the straight decode mode by pressing STRAIGHT (p.48). I want to enjoy pure high fidelity sounds. • Enable the direct playback mode by pressing DIRECT (p.49). This mode reduces the electrical noise from other circuitry to allow you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 45 En Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Sci-Fi ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Sound program Note ▪ You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level (DSP Level)” (p.84) in the “Option” menu. ▪ To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. n Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. 46 En n Sound programs suitable for music (MUSIC) n Sound programs suitable for stereo playback (STEREO) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can select stereo playback. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. Note CINEMA DSP 3D (p.46) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.47) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “5ch Stereo” is selected. n Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. n Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. n Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. 47 En n Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel Enjoying unprocessed playback (surround decoder) You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. n Playing back in original channels (straight decode) When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. 1 For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.120). 1 Press STRAIGHT. The previously selected surround decoder is selected. You can change the surround decoder in “Sur.Decode” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select a surround decoder. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE SLEEP MUTE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS VOL. ECO STRAIGHT PROGRAM ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ZONE A FM/AM ZONE B USB INPUT SLEEP VOLUME NET BLUETOOTH SCENE MUTE SETUP BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU RED POP-UP/MENU HOME GREEN YELLOW BLUE PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING PROGRAM TUNING PRESET “SUR. DECODE” appears ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO †‡Pro Logic ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL bPro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. bPLII Movie Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for movies. bPLII Music Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for music. bPLII Game Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for games. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. Note You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu. 48 En Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 1 Press DIRECT. Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE 1 VOL. ECO DIRECT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. Note When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. “ENHANCER” lights up ▪ Selecting sound programs ▪ Adjusting the tone control CHARGE SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ▪ Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus Enhancer On ▪ Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Note Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) ▪ Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. – Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. 1 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT – High-definition streaming audio ▪ You can also use “Enhancer (Enhancer)” (p.85) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Press BASS. Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled. Note You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass. 49 En Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-V481) You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. 4 5 Note ▪ The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. ▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. Selecting a frequency for reception Setting the frequency steps 1 (Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models only) At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. Press FM/AM to select a band. “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. CHARGE OUT 1 2 ECO When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) 3 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. TU••••FM50/AM9 SLEEP MUTE VOL. FM 87.50MHz Set the unit to standby mode. PROGRAM ENHANCER STEREO TUNED ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 50 En ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 2 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU n Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) PROGRAM FM/AM USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). BLUE NET TUNING BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP Note OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING ▪ To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually” (p.52). TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME ▪ (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto Preset function. POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED 1 2 3 SLEEP MUTE VOL. FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. Press FM/AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. CHARGE OUT Preset Note ▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by selecting “FM Mode” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. ▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)” (p.86) in the “Option” menu. 51 En ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 4 n Registering a radio station manually To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT 1 SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:FM 87.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 2 Preset number from which to start the registration Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.50) to tune into the desired radio station. Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Note ▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or PRESET to select a preset number. ▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE FM/AM OUT VOL. ECO USB INPUT Auto Preset RED VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP MEMORY OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number Note To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered 52 En n Selecting a preset station n Clearing preset stations Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 2 1 2 3 Press FM/AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU Press FM/AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. PROGRAM CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT FM/AM RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE BLUETOOTH SETUP MEMORY TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED 4 5 OPTION ENTER RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE PRESET MEMORY TUNING ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset NET MUTE TUNING PRESET Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED 01:FM 98.50MHz SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:FM 98.50MHz SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO CHARGE SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO USB INPUT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. Note “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 01:Cleared 6 7 53 En SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Radio Data System tuning n Receiving traffic information automatically (U.K. and Europe models only) When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. 1 2 n Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. Note Note We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.51). 2 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. ▪ To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. ▪ To cancel the search, press RETURN. Press INFO. ▪ Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type CHARGE Note “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. VOL. ECO CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Traffic information station (frequency) SLEEP MUTE OUT Program Service VOL. TP FM101.30MHz About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE ECO Item name CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT Note “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. 54 En Listening to DAB radio (RX-V481D) DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient transmission method. Preparing the DAB tuning Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial scan. Note 1 ▪ The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. ▪ Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/. Press FM/DAB to select the DAB band. The following message appears on the front panel if you have not performed an initial scan yet. ▪ For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.25). CHARGE ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press [ENTER] 2 Press ENTER to start an initial scan. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO >>>------- 30% ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO BBC Radio 4 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Note ▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again. ▪ You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.59). ▪ To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. 55 En Selecting a DAB radio station for reception Note You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan. ▪ When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”. 1 ▪ “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available. Secondary station Press FM/DAB to select the DAB band. CHARGE BBC National ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM FM/DAB USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET TUNING BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET (RX-V481D) CHARGE ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO Daily Service ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)” (p.86) in the “Option” menu. Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station. ZONE A SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station currently selected is displayed. 2 ENHANCER OUT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 56 En Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) OUT VOL. ECO 01:BBC Radio 4 You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. Note You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. n Registering a DAB radio station as presets OUT VOL. ECO “Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use) n Selecting a preset DAB radio station Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds. Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. 1 2 ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 02:Empty Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.56) to tune into the desired DAB radio station. ZONE A SLEEP MUTE ENHANCER CHARGE Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number. 2 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number Note 1 SLEEP MUTE ENHANCER CHARGE Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station. POP UP/MENU ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP PROGRAM SCENE FM/DAB USB INPUT VOLUME RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS BLUE TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM NET BLUETOOTH FM/DAB MEMORY MUTE MEMORY USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET SETUP OPTION BLUETOOTH ENTER RETURN TOP MENU TUNING SETUP DISPLAY HOME MEMORY MUTE TUNING OPTION POP-UP/MENU ENTER TUNING PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW TUNING BLUE RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY TOP MENU TUNING HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET TUNING PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET (RX-V481D) (RX-V481D) CHARGE ENHANCER OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO PRESET:01 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Note “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered. 57 En PRESET n Clearing preset DAB radio stations Displaying the DAB information Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers. The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB radio station. 1 2 3 Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. Tune into the desired DAB radio station. Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display items. ENHANCER CHARGE CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE SLEEP MUTE OUT OUT VOL. ECO Preset 4 5 Item name About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO Classic Music ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 01:Clear? ENHANCER CHARGE SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”. CHARGE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 01:Cleared 6 7 SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Service Label Station name DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) Information on the current station Ensemble Label Ensemble name Program Type Station genre Date And Time Current date and time Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best]) DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Note Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station. 58 En Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to 100 [best]). 1 2 3 4 Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB channel label. ENHANCER CHARGE OUT 5A Level: 80 DAB channel label 5 SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Reception strength To exit from the menu, press OPTION. n DAB frequency information The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. Frequency Channel label 232.496 MHz 13B 234.208 MHz 13C Frequency Channel label 235.776 MHz 13D 174.928 MHz 5A 237.488 MHz 13E 176.640 MHz 5B 239.200 MHz 13F 178.352 MHz 5C 180.064 MHz 5D 181.936 MHz 6A 183.648 MHz 6B 185.360 MHz 6C 187.072 MHz 6D 188.928 MHz 7A 190.640 MHz 7B 192.352 MHz 7C 194.064 MHz 7D 195.936 MHz 8A 197.648 MHz 8B 199.360 MHz 8C 201.072 MHz 8D 202.928 MHz 9A 204.640 MHz 9B 206.352 MHz 9C 208.064 MHz 9D 209.936 MHz 10A 211.648 MHz 10B 213.360 MHz 10C 215.072 MHz 10D 216.928 MHz 11A 218.640 MHz 11B 220.352 MHz 11C 222.064 MHz 11D 223.936 MHz 12A 225.648 MHz 12B 227.360 MHz 12C 229.072 MHz 12D 230.784 MHz 13A 59 En Listening to FM radio (RX-V481D) You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. Note ▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception from “FM Mode” (p.83) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Selecting a frequency for reception 1 ▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)” (p.86) in the “Option” menu. Press FM/DAB to select the FM band. Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. OUT VOL. ECO FM 87.50MHz 2 You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. SLEEP MUTE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Note You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. n Registering FM radio stations automatically (Auto Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. ZONE A Preset) ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). POP UP/MENU PROGRAM Note FM/DAB USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. NET TUNING BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING TUNING 1 2 3 DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET (RX-V481D) CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. OUT FM 98.50MHz VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from an FM radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. 60 En ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 4 n Registering an FM radio station manually To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT 1 SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:FM 87.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 2 Preset number from which to start the registration Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.50) to tune into the desired FM radio station. Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds. The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Note ▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or PRESET to select a preset number. ▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE FM/DAB OUT VOL. ECO USB INPUT Auto Preset RED VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP MEMORY OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET (RX-V481D) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number Note To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered 61 En n Selecting a preset FM radio station n Clearing preset FM radio stations Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 2 1 2 3 Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM radio station. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU Press FM/DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. PROGRAM CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT FM/DAB RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE BLUETOOTH SETUP MEMORY TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED 4 5 OPTION ENTER RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE PRESET MEMORY TUNING ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset NET MUTE TUNING PRESET Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT (RX-V481D) CHARGE OUT 01:FM 98.50MHz SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:FM 98.50MHz SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO USB INPUT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset station to be cleared ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. Note “No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 01:Cleared 6 7 62 En SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. n Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. Note We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.51). 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency Note “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. 63 En Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/ headphones. Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. Note The unit The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) 1 2 The unit Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. Bluetooth speakers/headphones 3 Note ▪ To use the BLUETOOTH function, set “Bluetooth” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. ▪ You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time. Note ▪ For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122). ▪ If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. ▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. 64 En Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/ headphones Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit. 1 Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an input source. Select an input source other than Bluetooth. 2 3 4 5 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Bluetooth” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to set “Bluetooth” to “On”, and then set “Transmitter” to “On” in the same way. Use the cursor keys to select “Device Search” to search the Bluetooth devices. The list of available Bluetooth devices is displayed. 6 Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with the unit and press ENTER. When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones. Note ▪ If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing mode and then select “Device Search”. ▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/headphones. 65 En Playing back music with AirPlay The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes 1 PC Router Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( The unit iTunes (example) ) appears. iOS 9 (example) (Wired network or wireless network) iPhone/iPad/iPod touch Note Note If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. ▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.26). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu. 2 ▪ If the iPod does not recognize the unit, check your network environment (p.26). ▪ This section describes “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. 3 ▪ For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122). On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 66 En Note n Playback screen ▪ The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. ▪ You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 1 AirPlay ▪ You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu. Artist Album ▪ You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)” (p.86) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. 2 Song 2 : 30 Notice ▪ When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. 1 2 Playback indicator Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM FM/AM USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP RETURN TOP MENU External device operation keys OPTION ENTER TUNING TUNING DISPLAY HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET External device operation keys a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g 67 En Function Skips forward/backward. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Playback of USB storage device contents Note For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122). Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. ▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. The unit (front) 1 RADIO STRAIGHT AUX USB AUDIO 5V (CONNECT) Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen (p.69) is displayed on the TV. Note 1A If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.69) is displayed. Note USB storage device ▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. ▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. ▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. Note ▪ If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case, “Loading…” appears in the front display. ▪ Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. ▪ Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. 68 En n Playback screen n Browse screen 4 1 2 Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 1 USB USB - Top Artist Album 5 2 Song 2 : 30 1/9999 3 1 List name 2 Contents list 1 Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 3 4 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Item number/total Status indicators Use the following remote control keys to control playback. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.70) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.70) and playback status (such as play/pause). ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE Operation menu BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. POP UP/MENU FM/AM USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE Icon HOME PROGRAM SETUP Function RETURN Moves 10 pages backward. TOP MENU External device operation keys OPTION ENTER TUNING TUNING DISPLAY HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY Moves to the previous page of the list. TUNING TUNING PRESET Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. External device operation keys Moves to the playback screen. Note A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display. Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. Note A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch the displayed item, press INFO (p.43). 69 En n Repeat/shuffle settings You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. Note ▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ▪ Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Repeat Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. (Repeat) Shuffle (Shuffle) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. 70 En Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. For Windows Media Player 11 Note 1 2 3 ▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.26). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. ▪ For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.122). Media sharing setup 4 To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Click “OK” to exit. Note n For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software For Windows Media Player 12 5 Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. n For a PC with Windows Media Player installed 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. Click “OK” to exit. 71 En n Browse screen Playback of PC music contents You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Note 2 ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 SERVER - Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 5 1/9999 3 Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. 1 The browse screen (p.72) is displayed on the TV. 2 List name Contents list Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Note If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 3 4 2 3 4 1 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. Item number/total Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.73) and playback status (such as play/pause). Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. 5 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.73) is displayed. Icon Function Note Moves 10 pages backward. ▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Moves to the previous page of the list. ▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. Moves to the next page of the list. ▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. 72 En n Repeat/shuffle settings n Playback screen You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content. 1 SERVER 1 2 Artist Album 2 Song 2 : 30 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. Note 1 ▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Status indicators ▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.73) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 3 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Use the following remote control keys to control playback. ZONE A Repeat ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU Function Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. (Repeat) PROGRAM FM/AM USB INPUT Setting Off (Off) RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP External device operation keys OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING Shuffle TUNING (Shuffle) DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING 4 PRESET External device operation keys Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. Note You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.103). 73 En To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Listening to Internet radio You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. n Browse screen Note 4 1 ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.26). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu. 2 ▪ You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. NET RADIO - Top Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help ▪ The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. 1/7 3 ▪ This service may be discontinued without notice. 1 Playback of Internet radio 2 You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. Contents list 3 Item number/total 4 Playback indicator 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. The browse screen (p.74) is displayed on the TV. 2 List name Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and start playback. 1 5 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.75) is displayed. Moves to the previous page of the list. Note Moves to the next page of the list. ▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Moves 10 pages forward. ▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. Moves to the playback screen. 74 En n Playback screen 1 NET RADIO Station Album Song 2 2 : 30 1 2 Playback indicator Playback information Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Note ▪ Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback. ▪ Some information may not be available depending on the station. 75 En Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder. 3 n Registering the station with the Option menu You can switch the language. Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the “Bookmarks” folder. 1 2 Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. Note ▪ On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. On the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. ▪ To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. Enter the vTuner ID in this area. Note n Registering the station on the vTuner website To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your email address. You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations on the vTuner website. 1 4 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. Click the “Add” icon (¤+) next to the station name. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Register your favorite radio stations. Note Check the vTuner ID of the unit. To remove the station from the “My__Favorites” folder, select “My__Favorites” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (¤–) next to the station name. You can find the vTuner ID in “Information” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu. 76 En Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections HDMI OUT LESS NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDCP2.2 (NET) ARC 1(BD/DVD) 2 3 4 ANTENNA Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers allows you to have more highquality sounds. FM AM The unit (rear) 75 Ω SPEAKERS For example, you can use 2-way bi-amplified speakers with a woofer and tweeter for front speakers. It produces expansive sound in bi-amp system featuring a woofer and tweeter. By directly driving each speaker individually, it produces powerful sound while maintaining the feeling of high S/N ratio. FRONT VIDEO OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B MONITOR OUT AV 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AV 4 Note When using the four internal amplifiers in bi-amp system, the unit supports only 2.1 or 3.1-channel speaker system. Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections 1 2 3 9 When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Note ▪ Surround speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. ▪ The FRONT terminals and SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals output the same signals. Notice ▪ Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. 77 En Playing back music in multiple rooms The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). Connecting Zone B speakers For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms simultaneously. Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit. Notice ▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers. ▪ Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables. LESS HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 ARC To utilize the SURROUND/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals for Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone B” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 1(BD/DVD) 2 (NET) 3 4 ANTENNA FM Study room (Zone B) (RADIO) AM The unit (rear) 75 Ω SPEAKERS FRONT VIDEO CENTER SURROUND/BI-AMP /ZONE B MONITOR OUT Living room (Zone A) Note OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDI0 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AV 4 ▪ When connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack, you cannot use Zone B speakers. ▪ Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the Zone B. ▪ The same input source is applied to both Zone A and Zone B. 1 ▪ By default, the volume for Zone B changes in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. If there is volume difference between Zone A/B, you can correct it in “ZoneB Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.80). Also, you can adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.80). 1 9 2 2 3 ▪ You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection (p.44) Zone B Zone A Note Surround speakers or bi-amp speakers cannot be used during Zone B connections. 78 En Operating the Zone B 3 n Basic playback procedure Use the input selection keys to select an input source. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS PROGRAM PROGRAM 1 Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”. FM/AM USB INPUT VOLUME NET FM/AM BLUETOOTH MUTE ZONE A SETUP ZONE B USB OPTION SLEEP SCENE INPUT ENTER BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS RETURN DISPLAY VOLUME Inputselection selectionkeys keys Input NET PROGRAM TOP MENU ZONE A FM/AM ZONE B RED TUNING BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY HOME YELLOW BLUE 4 5 PROGRAM TUNING PRESET Press z (receiver power). OUT 1 2 ECO HDMI1 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” and then press VOLUME to adjust the volume. To adjust the volume for Zone B separately, see “Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately” (p.80). “ZONE B” lights up ENHANCER STEREO TUNED MUTE Note Each time you press the key, the ZONE B audio output is on or off. CHARGE BLUETOOTH ZONE A ZONE B POP-UP/MENU MEMORY TUNING 2 BLUE TUNING PRESET SCENE MUTE SETUP GREEN YELLOW SLEEP VOLUME NET BLUETOOTH RED GREEN POP-UP/MENU MEMORY USB INPUT TOP MENU HOME PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 79 En n Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately n Correcting volume difference between Zone A and Zone B You can separately adjust the volume for Zone B using the remote control when “ZoneB Volume” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”. If you are bothered by volume difference between Zone A/B, follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B. 1 1 2 Press OPTION. Note Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” in menu operations. 2 ▪ To mute the audio output to Zone B, press MUTE. ▪ The volume of the Zone B is not displayed on the front display. Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim” (Volume Trim) and press ENTER. ▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim” (ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the setting. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume for Zone B. Note Note 3 Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Note This setting is not effective when “ZoneB Volume” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”. 80 En Useful functions Registering favorite items (shortcut) n Registering an item You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. 1 2 Note ▪ You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.76). ▪ Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be registered. Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. Hold down MEMORY for 3 seconds. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM FM/AM USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP MEMORY OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET CHARGE ENHANCER OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 01:Empty Shortcut number (flashes) Note To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the shortcut number after step 2. CHARGE ENHANCER OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 81 En To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. n Recalling a registered item Note Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. ▪ The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. 1 ▪ “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. – A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit. Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB. – A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. ZONE A – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS PROGRAM – A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. PROGRAM ▪ When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. FM/AM USB INPUT VOLUME NET FM/AM BLUETOOTH MUTE SETUP USB OPTION INPUT ENTER RETURN VOLUME TOP MENU HOME RED GREEN USB NET BLUETOOTH NET DISPLAY POP-UP/MENU BLUETOOTH BLUE YELLOW MEMORY TUNING TUNING MUTE PRESET 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS TOP MENU HOME POP UP/MENU PROGRAM FM/AM USB INPUT RED VOLUME GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE NET BLUETOOTH MEMORY MUTE SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN TUNING TUNING DISPLAY TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE PRESET MEMORY TUNING TUNING PRESET CHARGE OUT ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:USB ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 82 En Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Option menu items Note ▪ Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Press OPTION. ▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ▪ Default settings are underlined. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Input Select ▪ Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available. For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Front display Option Input Select Tone Control DSP/Surround Volume Trim Item Function Input Select (Input Select) Switches the input source. p.84 Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and lowfrequency range individually. p.84 Program (PRG) Select the sound programs and stereo playback. p.46 Sur.Decode (SrDec) Select which surround decoder is used when Sur.Decode is selected as the program. p.48 Adjusts the sound field effect level. p.84 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. p.84 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. p.85 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. p.85 Lipsync Signal Info. Audio In RETURN Back DSP Level DSP/Surround (DSP Level) (DSP/ Surround) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Note To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Volume Trim Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. (Volume Trim) (SW.Trim) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. ZoneB Trim (ZB.Trim) 83 Page p.85 Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. p.80 Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. p.85 Signal Info. (Signal Info.) Displays information about the video/audio signal. p.85 Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. p.86 Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. p.86 FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception. p.50, p.60 En Item Function Auto Preset p.51, p.60 Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. p.53, p.58, p.62 Preset (Preset) Clear Preset Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device (p.70) or media server (p.73). — Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock) via AirPlay. Tune Aid (Tune Aid) Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the “Bookmarks” folder, or removes it from the “Bookmarks” folder. (RX-V481D only) Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception. (RX-V481D only) Checks reception strength of each DAB channel. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) — Init Scan (Init Scan) Choices p.54 Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device (p.70) or media server (p.73). Bookmark Off (Bookmark Off) Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually. (U.K. and Europe models only) Repeat (Repeat) Bookmark On (Bookmark On) n Tone Control (Tone Control) Page Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. Note ▪ When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears. ▪ You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”, then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. p.86 ▪ If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. n DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) p.76 Configures the sound field program and surround settings. p.55 DSP Level (DSP Level) p.59 Adjusts the sound field effect level. Setting range n Input Select (Input Select) -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments) Switches the input source. Press ENTER to switch to the selected input source. Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Choices Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, MusicCast Link, AirPlay, (network sources), Bluetooth, AUX Settings On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. 84 En n Lipsync (Lipsync) Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49). Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu. Note Note This setting is applied separately to each input source. ▪ This setting is applied separately to each input source. ▪ You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. n Signal Info. (Signal Info.) Default TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay (network sources), Bluetooth: On (On) Others: Off (Off) Displays information about the video/audio signal. Choices Format (FORMAT) n Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Audio format of the input signal The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) Channel (CHANNEL) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. Sampling (SAMPLING) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Note Bitrate (BITRATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Video In (VIDEO IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal Video Out (VIDEO OUT) Type and resolution of the output digital signal Note This setting is applied separately to each input source. To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) 85 En n Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output Input sources HDMI 1-4, AV 1-4 Setup procedure See “Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks” (p.23). n Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can watch the video while listening to the radio. Input sources AUDIO, TUNER, USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, Bluetooth, AUX Settings Off (Off) Does not output video. HDMI 1-4, AV 1-4 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. n Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Settings Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (Ltd) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). 86 En CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup Menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 5 Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen. 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Setup Speaker HDMI Sound ECO Function Network Bluetooth Language RETURN 3 Back Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Speaker Configuration Distance Level Equalizer Test Tone Note To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. 87 En To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Setup menu items Menu Item Configuration Speaker HDMI Function Page Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. p.90 p.90 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. p.90 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. p.90 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. p.91 Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. p.91 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. p.91 Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. p.91 Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. p.91 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. p.91 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. p.92 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. p.92 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. p.92 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. p.93 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. p.93 p.93 Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. p.93 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. p.94 ARC Enables/disables ARC. p.94 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. p.94 88 En Menu Item DSP Parameter Sound Lipsync Dialogue Volume ECO Function Network Bluetooth Page Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. p.95 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. p.95 Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. p.95 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. p.95 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. p.95 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. p.96 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. p.96 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. p.96 Scale Switches the scale of the volume display. p.96 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. p.96 Max Volume Sets the limit value of the volume. p.97 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. p.97 ZoneB Volume Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. p.97 Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. p.98 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). p.98 Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. p.99 Input Skip Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key. p.100 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. p.100 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. p.100 Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. p.101 Information Displays the network information on the unit. p.102 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. p.102 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). p.102 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. p.103 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. p.103 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. p.103 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. p.104 Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. p.104 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. p.104 Audio Receive Audio Send Language Function CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Disconnect Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. p.64 Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). p.104 Transmitter Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. p.105 Device Search Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. p.65 Select an on-screen menu language. p.105 89 En Speaker Configures the speaker settings manually. Front Note Selects the size of the front speakers. Default settings are underlined. Settings n Configuration Select this option for small speakers. Small Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. Note Select this option for large speakers. When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6‑1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6‑1/4”). Large “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Selects a speaker system. Center In addition to the 5.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connections. Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connections). BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support biamp connections (p.77). Zone B Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.78) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A). Settings Select this option for small speakers. Small None Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Settings Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. None The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Select this option for large speakers. Large Subwoofer Use The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Note Power Amp Assign Surround The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. 90 En The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Surround Extra Bass Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Settings Select this option for small speakers. Small Large Settings The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Off Disables Extra Bass. Select this option for large speakers. On Enables Extra Bass. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Note You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.49). Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. None The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. Crossover Settings Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. Note 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz ▪ Select “On” only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.15). Note ▪ This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. n Distance Subwoofer Phase Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Choices Settings Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft) Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) 91 En n Manual equalizer adjustment n Level 1 2 Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) 3 Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB 4 Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. n Test Tone EQ Select Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Selects the type of equalizer to be used. Settings Off Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB n Equalizer GEQ Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. Setting range Others: -1.0 dB PEQ Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. Settings Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.29). Off Does not output test tones. Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Does not use the equalizer. Note “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.29). 92 En HDMI Configures the HDMI settings. HDMI OUT (TV) Note Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Default settings are underlined. Settings n HDMI Control Off Disables the audio output from the TV. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.124). On Enables the audio output from the TV. Settings Off n Standby Through Disables HDMI Control. Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Enables HDMI Control. On Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. Note Settings To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.124) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Off n Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. Note This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. (When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. Auto Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on the status of the connected device. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) n TV Audio Input Amp Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. AUDIO 1–2, AV 1–4 On Enables the audio output from the speakers. Default AV 2 Note When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. 93 En n SCENE n Standby Sync Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback Choices (SCENE keys) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. BD / DVD, TV, NET, RADIO Settings n ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Default Off Disables ARC. BD / DVD, TV: On On Enables ARC. NET, RADIO: Off Note You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. 94 Note SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. En Sound Configures the audio output settings. Dimension Note Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Default settings are underlined. n DSP Parameter Setting range Configures the surround decoder settings. -3 to 0 to +3 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Center Image Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.46). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo). Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Setting range 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is enabled, you can wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Settings Off Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Setting range 0 to 3 to 7 95 En n Lipsync n Dialogue Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. Note Dialogue Level You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync (Lipsync)” (p.85) in the “Option” menu. Adjusts the volume of the center orientation sounds such as dialogue. Setting range Select 0 to 3 (higher to strengthen) Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. n Volume Setting range Manual Configures the volume settings. Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Scale Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. Switches the scale of the volume display. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit. 0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0). Settings Note “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. Dynamic Range Adjustment Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Settings Setting range Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Min/Auto 96 En Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Max Volume Sets the limit value of the volume. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [50.0 to 95.0 (5.0 increments), 97.0] Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB increments) Sets the level to the specified volume level. [0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)] ZoneB Volume Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Settings Sync. Adjusts the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Async. Does not adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.80). Note If “ZoneB Volume” is set to “Async.”, the volume for Zone B is temporarily set to -40 dB. As necessary, adjust the volume using the remote control (p.80). 97 En ECO Configures the power supply settings. Note Default settings are underlined. n Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 minutes Other models: Off Note Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. n ECO Mode You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting the eco mode to “On”. After setting, be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. Note ▪ When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. ▪ If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. 98 En Function Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Procedure to rename manually Note Default settings are underlined. 1 n Input Rename 2 Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. You can also select a name from the presets or a name created by the Auto Rename function. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Manual” and press ENTER. Input sources Note HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, USB, Bluetooth, AUX To select the preset name, use the cursor keys (e/r). Default 3 HDMI 1-4: Auto Others: Manual (For USB, Bluetooth, AUX only “Manual” can be selected.) The edit screen is displayed. 4 Procedure to rename automatically 1 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed. To cancel the entry, select “CANCEL”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto”. To check a created name, press ENTER. Note During selecting “Auto”, the created name is saved even after the device connection is terminated. To reset to the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” at once and then set it again to “Auto”. 4 5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to confirm the new name. Note The unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. 3 Press ENTER. To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 99 En To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. n Input Skip n Dimmer Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key. Adjusts the brightness of the front display. You can select the desired input source quickly by using this function. Setting range Input sources -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX Note Settings The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.98) is set to “On”. Off Does not skip the selected input source. On Skips the selected input source. n Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Note When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. 100 En n Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. Settings Default Assigns the functions of playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Assigns the unit's input sources to each key. The assigned input sources can be set separately. Input Input sources HDMI 1-4, AUDIO 1-2, AV 1-4, TUNER, USB, NET, Bluetooth, AUX Default RED: HDMI2, GREEN: HDMI4, YELLOW: AV 2, BLUE: AUX Assigns the functions of sound mode to each key. RED: MOVIE GREEN: MUSIC Program YELLOW: STEREO BLUE: SUR.DECODE For example, if you press the RED key repeatedly, you can select your favorite sound program from the sound programs (MOVIE) (p.46) suitable for the video source. 101 En Network Configures the network settings. n IP Address Note Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Default settings are underlined. DHCP n Information Select whether to use a DHCP server. Displays the network information on the unit. Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack Connection Connection method SSID The access point to which the unit is connected Security The encryption method for your network MusicCast Network Readiness or not for the MusicCast Network MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC Address (Wi-Fi) Settings IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner) Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). n Manual network settings MAC address IP Address Off 1 2 n Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 3 Choices Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable. Wireless(Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.34). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.39). 102 4 En Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. n MAC Address Filter n DMC Control Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Note Settings Operation of the AirPlay function (p.66) or the DMC is not limited by this setting. Filter Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Note Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. n Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. Settings n Procedure On 1 2 3 Off Disables the network standby function. Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Enables the network standby function. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10). Auto Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 103 En (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) n Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. n Bluetooth Procedure 1 2 3 Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.64). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Settings Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to confirm the new name. Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. n Audio Receive To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver. n Network Update Bluetooth Standby Updates the firmware via the network. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. Perform Update Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.109). Settings Firmware Version Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit. Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Note System ID This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.103) is set to “Off”. Displays the system ID number. 104 En n Audio Send Language Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter. Select an on-screen menu language. Note Transmitter Default settings are underlined. Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. Settings When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones (p.65). English English 日本語 Japanese Settings Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Русский Russian Italiano Italian 中文 Chinese Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. Note The information on the front display is provided in English only. 105 En Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Set the unit to standby mode. Note Default settings are underlined. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). Item SP IMP. z (power) REMOTE ID 3 4 5 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM to select an item. Page (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changes the speaker impedance setting. Selects the unit’s remote control ID. (Asia, Taiwan and General models only) TU PROGRAM Function Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. p.106 p.107 p.107 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. p.107 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. p.107 INIT Restores the default settings. p.108 UPDATE Updates the firmware. p.108 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. p.108 Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) The new settings take effect. CHARGE OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO SP IMP.••8¬MIN ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 106 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. 8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. En Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) SLEEP MUTE CHARGE OUT VOL. ECO REMOTE ID••ID1 Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL TV FORMAT•NTSC ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. ID1, ID2 Settings NTSC, PAL n Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Taiwan and General models: NTSC To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds. To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds. Other models: PAL Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) 4K MODE•MODE 2 Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. (Asia, Taiwan and General models only) CHARGE OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO TU••••FM50/AM9 Settings ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. MODE 1 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. Settings MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Note When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. 107 En Checking the firmware version (VERSION) Restoring the default settings (INIT) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE CHARGE OUT VOL. ECO INIT••••CANCEL ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL VERSION••xx.xx ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Restores the default settings for the unit. Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. Choices Note ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. ▪ You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. Updating the firmware (UPDATE) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO UPDATE•••••USB ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. n Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. 108 En Updating the unit’s firmware via the network New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after SETUP is pressed. Network Setup Notice New firmware available. ▪ Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). Press ENTER to update now. (You can also start the update ▪ If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.108). from the "Setup-Network" screen.) RETURN ▪ To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.108). Language CANCEL <English> You can switch the language. ▪ For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. Note 1 2 You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.108). Read the on-screen description and press ENTER. To start the firmware update, press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. 3 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. 109 En APPENDIX Frequently asked questions I want to change the input source name... The frequently asked questions from customers and the answers are shown below. The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.29). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.90). We want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, input source names (such as “HDMI1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like, use “Input Rename” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.100). If someone accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.97). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.107). I want to fix the volume when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.97). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… The volume varies depending on the input sources... You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.85). If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/ audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. HDMI Control does not work at all... To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.124). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.23). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.96). 110 En I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.93). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.28). I want to update the firmware... Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.108). 111 En Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: 1 2 3 The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet in the power supply voltage. and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. The sleep timer worked. The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” for the specified time. menu to “Off” (p.98). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.106). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet in the power supply voltage. and plug it again.) 112 En Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cannot select the desired input source even if “INPUT” is pressed. The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control do not operate. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.107). The remote control is set to the Zone B operation mode. Set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode (p.80). The function which skips some input sources is set. Set “Input Skip” of the desired input source in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.100). The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys. Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys. The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote control have been changed. Set the “Remote Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default” (p.101). Audio Problem Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.85). Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.97). No sound. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.85). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.92). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.90). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.92). Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. 113 En Problem Cause Remedy The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE) To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the or low-frequency signals. front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.91). No sound is coming from the subwoofer. Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.29) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.90). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. No sound from the playback device (connected to The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the unit with HDMI). the SPEAKERS terminals. No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.93). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.21). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. (If you are trying to use ARC) Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.93). Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.94). Also, enable ARC on the TV. ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. When playing back DSD audio, the unit disables the audio output from a TV. The unit does not support DSD audio output from a TV. Change the audio output setting on the playback device to PCM. Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.85). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.98). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. 114 En Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2 compatible HDMI device) from the playback device connected to the unit with HDMI. The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.85). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.126). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2. (The Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.) Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.21 to p.22). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 115 En FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-V481) Problem FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. To select monaural FM radio reception “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” (p.50). The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Use an outdoor FM antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Select the station manually (p.50). Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.50). Use an outdoor AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.52). Auto Preset has been used. DAB radio (RX-V481D) Problem Cause Remedy No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.55). Reception strength of DAB radio is poor. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.59), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. There is no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area. There is multi-path interference. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.59), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not provide information. Contact the DAB broadcaster. No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station. No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial scan. DAB radio reception is weak or noisy. 116 En USB and network Problem The unit does not detect the USB device. Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.102). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.102). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.71). The unit does not detect the PC. Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. of the unit to your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.103). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.71). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.103). The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.108). The mobile device does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay or AV CONTROLLER. The unit and the mobile device are connected to different SSID when using a multiple SSID router. Connect them to the Primary SSID (at the top of the list). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. 117 En Problem The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. Cause Remedy The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). Bluetooth® Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.104). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.64). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that Move the unit away from those devices. outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.64). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.64). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that Move the unit away from those devices. outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. 118 En Error indications on the front display Refer to the table below when the error message is indicated on the front display. Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.71). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Access error There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Make sure your router and modem are turned on. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.26). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly. The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.107). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.71). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Not connected Unable to play 119 En Glossary This is a glossary of the technical terms used in this manual. DTS-HD Master Audio Audio information DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). n Audio decoding format DTS Neo: 6 DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). Dolby Pro Logic II DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. FLAC FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. MP3 Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Sampling frequency/Quantization bit DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray Disc). 120 En WAV x.v.Color Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. Network information SSID n Others SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. Wi-Fi A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel WPS This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. HDMI and video information Composite video signal CINEMA DSP 3D With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/ video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. 121 The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. En Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) Supported devices and file formats The following devices and file formats can be used by the unit. Supported devices The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. n Bluetooth® devices • Bluetooth devices that support A2DP can be used. • Yamaha does not assure the connections of all Bluetooth devices. n USB devices • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. n AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. Made for. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini, iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2 iPod touch (5th generation) (as of April 2016) 122 En File formats Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. n USB, PC/NAS File Sampling frequency (kHz) WAV * 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 Video device quantization bit (bit) 16/24 Bitrate (kbps) - Number of channels 2 The unit TV Support for gapless playback 4 MP3 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 - WMA 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 - MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 - FLAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 - 2 4 ALAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96 16/24 - 2 4 AIFF 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 - 2 4 DSD 2.8 MHz/ 5.6 MHz 1 - 2 - HDMI connection HDMI in HDMI HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI Composite video connection VIDEO in VIDEO * Linear PCM format only • To play back FLAC files stored on your PC/NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. 123 En VIDEO VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO Information on HDMI (Example) The additional information on HDMI is as follows. HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) Turns on and displays video from the playback device To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. n Operations available from the TV’s remote control For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • Standby synchronization Note • Volume control including mute This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner 1 2 • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. 1 2 Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. Press SETUP. ZONE A ZONE B SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MUTE SETUP PROGRAM Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) FM/AM USB INPUT VOLUME SETUP OPTION NET BLUETOOTH Turn off the TV MUTE SETUP Cursor keys ENTER OPTION ENTER ENTER n Operations available from the unit’s remote control RETURN TOP MENU DISPLAY HOME POP-UP/MENU RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW DISPLA DISPLAY BLUE MEMORY • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.44) TUNING TUNING PRESET • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) 124 En TOP MENU HOME POP-UP/MENU 3 8 Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. Setup Speaker HDMI Sound ECO Note Function Language RETURN 4 ▪ If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. Back ▪ If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. HDMI HDMI Control ▪ If you reconnect the HDMI cable, perform the procedure 5-8 again. ▪ We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. On Audio Output TV Audio Input Standby Sync ARC AV2 Auto On SCENE RETURN 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. Back If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “TV Audio Input” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO1”. Press SETUP. Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 125 En Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI signal compatibility ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. n Audio signals Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 2” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: ▪ “ARC” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. ▪ The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Audio signal type Audio signal format 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Compatible media (example) CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express n Video signals Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: Note • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz ▪ If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.21). • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz ▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz ▪ “AV 2” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 2 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). • 576p/50 Hz Note ▪ When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. ▪ The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. ▪ To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. 126 En Trademarks The trademarks used in this manual are as follows. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. (For RX-V481D) The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning. 127 En “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Explanations regarding GPL This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/ LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications The specifications of this unit are as follows. HDMI Input jacks HDMI Features: • 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit), 3D Video, ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI Control (CEC), Auto Lip Sync, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”, HD audio playback, 21:9 Aspect Ratio, BT.2020 Colorimetry, HDR Compatible Analog Audio • Audio x 4 Video Format (Repeater Mode) • VGA • 480i/60 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) • Optical x 1 • Coaxial x 2 Video • Composite x 4 HDMI Input • HDMI x 4 Other jacks • USB x 1 (USB2.0) • NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) • NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/g/n) Audio Format • Dolby TrueHD • Dolby Digital Plus • Dolby Digital • DTS-HD Master Audio • DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • DTS Express • DTS • DSD 2-ch to 6-ch • PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) Output jacks Analog Audio • Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R*) * Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B] • Subwoofer Out x 1 • Headphone x 1 Content Protection: HDCP 2.2 compatible Video • Composite x 1 Link Function: CEC supported HDMI Output • HDMI OUT x 1 Other jacks YPAO MIC x 1 128 En TUNER Network Analog Tuner • [RX-V481 U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • [RX-V481 Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • [RX-V481D U.K. and Europe models] DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • [RX-V481D Other models] DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER) PC Client Function Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 AirPlay supported Internet Radio Wi-Fi function • Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method • Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection • Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device • Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode • Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz • Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n USB Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A Compatible Decoding Formats Bluetooth Decoding Format • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus • Dolby Digital • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 Sink Function • Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) • Supported profile – A2DP, AVRCP • Supported codec – SBC, AAC Post Decoding Format • Dolby Pro Logic • Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game • DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema Source Function • AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone) • Supported profile – A2DP • Supported codec – SBC Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device Bluetooth version • Ver. 2.1+EDR Wireless output • Bluetooth Class 2 Maximum communication distance • 10 m (33 ft) without interference 129 En Audio Section Output Level / Output Impedance • SUBWOOFER Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) • [U.S.A. and Canada models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) • [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω) – Front L/R Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance 80 W+80 W • [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) – Front L/R – Center – Surround L/R 1 V/1.2 kΩ • AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) 100 mV/470 Ω Frequency Response 95 W+95 W • AV 2 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) +0/-3 dB 95 W 95 W+95 W Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) • AV 2 etc. (DIRECT) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) 110 dB or more Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) • [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) • [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) • Front L/R (Speaker Out) – Front L/R 115 W/ch – Center 115 W/ch Channel Separation – Surround L/R 115 W/ch • AV 2 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) Volume Control • [U.S.A. and Canada models] • Range (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) – Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 140 W/ch (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) – Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 145 W/ch 135 W/ch 70 dB/50 dB or more MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB 0.5 dB Tone Control Characteristics • Bass Boost/Cut • Bass Turnover • [Other models] (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) – Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R • Step 150 μV or less • Treble Boost/Cut • Treble Turnover ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz 350 Hz ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz 3.5 kHz Dynamic Power (IHF) Filter Characteristics • [U.S.A. and Canada models] – Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) 110/130/160/180 W • [Other models] – Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω) 110/130/160 W (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) • H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) 12 dB/oct. • L.P.F. (Subwoofer) 24 dB/oct. Damping Factor • Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω 100 or more Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance • AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω) 200 mV/47 kΩ Maximum Input Signal • AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) 2.3 V 130 En Video Section DAB Section (RX-V481D) Video Signal Type Tuning Range • [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] • [Other models] NTSC 174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III) PAL Support Audio Format Video Signal Level • Composite MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+) 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Antenna Video Maximum Input Level 75 Ω unbalanced 1.5 Vp-p or more Video Signal to Noise Ratio 50 dB or more Tuning Range • [Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] • [Other models] 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) • Mono Power Supply • [U.S.A. and Canada models] • [Taiwan, Brazil and General model] FM Section • [U.S.A. and Canada models] General AC 120 V, 60 Hz AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • [China model] AC 220 V, 50 Hz • [Korea model] AC 220 V, 60 Hz • [Australia model] AC 240 V, 50 Hz • [U.K. and Europe models] • [Asia model] AC 230 V, 50 Hz AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption 3 μV (20.8 dBf) Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) 260 W Standby Power Consumption • Mono 65 dB • HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off 0.1 W • Stereo 64 dB • HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby Off 0.9 W • HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth Standby Off Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) • Mono 0.5% – Wired 1.8 W • Stereo 0.6% – Wireless (Wi-Fi) 1.9 W – Wireless Direct 2.0 W Antenna Input 75 Ω unbalanced AM section (RX-V481) Tuning Range • [U.S.A. and Canada models] • [Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] • [Other models] 530 kHz to 1710 kHz 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz • HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On 1.8 W • HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On 2.4 W Maximum Power Consumption • [Asia, Taiwan, Brazil and General models] 531 kHz to 1611 kHz 131 En 600 W Dimensions (W x H x D) 435 x 161 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-7/8”) Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright) * Including legs and protrusions 435 x 225.5 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 8-7/8” x 12-7/8”) Weight 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs) * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. 132 En Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation Published 02/2016 NV-B0 YH632A0/EN1-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V481D User manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V481D Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha RX-V481D Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha RX-V481D Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha RX-V481D Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V481D Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha RX-V481D Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V481D Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V481D Ohjekirja
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V481D Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V481D Kullanım kılavuzu
